Clarify case requirements for gas pseudo-ops
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC6X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
535 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
536 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
537 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TILEGX
540
541 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
542 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEPRO
545 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset VISIUM
548
549 @emph{Target Visium options:}
550 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset XTENSA
553
554 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
555 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
556 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
557 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
558 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
559 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset Z80
562
563 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
564 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
565 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
566 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
567 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
568 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
569 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
570 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset Z8000
573
574 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576
577 @c man end
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @c man begin OPTIONS
581
582 @table @gcctabopt
583 @include at-file.texi
584
585 @item -a[cdghlmns]
586 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @item -ac
590 omit false conditionals
591
592 @item -ad
593 omit debugging directives
594
595 @item -ag
596 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
597
598 @item -ah
599 include high-level source
600
601 @item -al
602 include assembly
603
604 @item -am
605 include macro expansions
606
607 @item -an
608 omit forms processing
609
610 @item -as
611 include symbols
612
613 @item =file
614 set the name of the listing file
615 @end table
616
617 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
618 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
619 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
620
621 @item --alternate
622 Begin in alternate macro mode.
623 @ifclear man
624 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
625 @end ifclear
626
627 @item --compress-debug-sections
628 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
629 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
630 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression
631 would make a given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed or renamed.
632
633 @ifset ELF
634 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
635 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
636 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
637 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
638 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
639 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
640 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
641 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
642 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
643 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} are equivalent to
644 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
645 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} compresses
646 DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
647 @end ifset
648
649 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
650 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
651
652 @item -D
653 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
654 other assemblers.
655
656 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
657 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
658 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
659
660 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
661 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
662 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
663 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
664 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
665 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
666
667 @item -f
668 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
669 compiler output).
670
671 @item -g
672 @itemx --gen-debug
673 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
674 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
675 ECOFF or DWARF2.
676
677 @item --gstabs
678 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
679 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
680
681 @item --gstabs+
682 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
683 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
684 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
685 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
686 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
687
688 @item --gdwarf-2
689 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
690 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
691 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
692
693 @item --gdwarf-sections
694 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
695 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
696 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
697 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
698 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
699 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
700 suffix.
701
702 @item --size-check=error
703 @itemx --size-check=warning
704 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
705
706 @item --help
707 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
708
709 @item --target-help
710 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
711
712 @item -I @var{dir}
713 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
714
715 @item -J
716 Don't warn about signed overflow.
717
718 @item -K
719 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
720 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
721 @end ifclear
722 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
723 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
724 @end ifset
725
726 @item -L
727 @itemx --keep-locals
728 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
729 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
730 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
731 @ifclear man
732 @xref{Symbol Names}.
733 @end ifclear
734
735 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
736 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
737 listing to @var{number}.
738
739 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
740 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
741 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
742
743 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
744 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
745 @var{number} bytes.
746
747 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
748 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
749 to @var{number} + 1.
750
751 @item -o @var{objfile}
752 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
753
754 @item -R
755 Fold the data section into the text section.
756
757 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
758 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
759 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
760 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
761 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
762 requirements at the expense of speed.
763
764 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
765 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
766 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
767 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
768
769 @ifset ELF
770 @item --sectname-subst
771 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
772 @ifclear man
773 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
774 @end ifclear
775 @end ifset
776
777 @item --statistics
778 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
779 assembly.
780
781 @item --strip-local-absolute
782 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
783
784 @item -v
785 @itemx -version
786 Print the @command{as} version.
787
788 @item --version
789 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
790
791 @item -W
792 @itemx --no-warn
793 Suppress warning messages.
794
795 @item --fatal-warnings
796 Treat warnings as errors.
797
798 @item --warn
799 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
800
801 @item -w
802 Ignored.
803
804 @item -x
805 Ignored.
806
807 @item -Z
808 Generate an object file even after errors.
809
810 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
811 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
812
813 @end table
814 @c man end
815
816 @ifset AARCH64
817
818 @ifclear man
819 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
820 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
821 @end ifclear
822
823 @ifset man
824 @c man begin OPTIONS
825 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
826 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
827 @c man end
828 @c man begin INCLUDE
829 @include c-aarch64.texi
830 @c ended inside the included file
831 @end ifset
832
833 @end ifset
834
835 @ifset ALPHA
836
837 @ifclear man
838 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
839 for an Alpha processor.
840 @end ifclear
841
842 @ifset man
843 @c man begin OPTIONS
844 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
845 processor.
846 @c man end
847 @c man begin INCLUDE
848 @include c-alpha.texi
849 @c ended inside the included file
850 @end ifset
851
852 @end ifset
853
854 @c man begin OPTIONS
855 @ifset ARC
856 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
857 an ARC processor.
858
859 @table @gcctabopt
860 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
861 This option selects the core processor variant.
862 @item -EB | -EL
863 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
864 @end table
865 @end ifset
866
867 @ifset ARM
868 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
869 processor family.
870
871 @table @gcctabopt
872 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
873 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
874 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
875 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
876 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
877 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
878 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
879 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
880 @item -mthumb
881 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
882 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
883 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
884 @item -EB | -EL
885 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
886 @item -mthumb-interwork
887 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
888 ARM code in mind.
889 @item -mccs
890 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
891 @item -k
892 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
893 @end table
894 @end ifset
895 @c man end
896
897 @ifset Blackfin
898
899 @ifclear man
900 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
901 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
902 @end ifclear
903
904 @ifset man
905 @c man begin OPTIONS
906 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
907 the Blackfin processor family.
908 @c man end
909 @c man begin INCLUDE
910 @include c-bfin.texi
911 @c ended inside the included file
912 @end ifset
913
914 @end ifset
915
916 @c man begin OPTIONS
917 @ifset CRIS
918 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
919 @end ifset
920
921 @ifset D10V
922 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
923 a D10V processor.
924 @table @gcctabopt
925 @cindex D10V optimization
926 @cindex optimization, D10V
927 @item -O
928 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
929 @end table
930 @end ifset
931
932 @ifset D30V
933 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
934 processor.
935 @table @gcctabopt
936 @cindex D30V optimization
937 @cindex optimization, D30V
938 @item -O
939 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
940
941 @cindex D30V nops
942 @item -n
943 Warn when nops are generated.
944
945 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
946 @item -N
947 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
948 @end table
949 @end ifset
950 @c man end
951
952 @ifset EPIPHANY
953 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
954 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
955
956 @ifclear man
957 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
958 configured for an Epiphany processor.
959 @end ifclear
960
961 @ifset man
962 @c man begin OPTIONS
963 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
964 an Epiphany processor.
965 @c man end
966 @c man begin INCLUDE
967 @include c-epiphany.texi
968 @c ended inside the included file
969 @end ifset
970
971 @end ifset
972
973 @ifset H8300
974
975 @ifclear man
976 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
977 for an H8/300 processor.
978 @end ifclear
979
980 @ifset man
981 @c man begin OPTIONS
982 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
983 processor.
984 @c man end
985 @c man begin INCLUDE
986 @include c-h8300.texi
987 @c ended inside the included file
988 @end ifset
989
990 @end ifset
991
992 @ifset I80386
993
994 @ifclear man
995 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
996 configured for an i386 processor.
997 @end ifclear
998
999 @ifset man
1000 @c man begin OPTIONS
1001 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1002 an i386 processor.
1003 @c man end
1004 @c man begin INCLUDE
1005 @include c-i386.texi
1006 @c ended inside the included file
1007 @end ifset
1008
1009 @end ifset
1010
1011 @c man begin OPTIONS
1012 @ifset I960
1013 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1014 Intel 80960 processor.
1015
1016 @table @gcctabopt
1017 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1018 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1019
1020 @item -b
1021 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1022
1023 @item -no-relax
1024 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1025 error if necessary.
1026
1027 @end table
1028 @end ifset
1029
1030 @ifset IP2K
1031 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1032 Ubicom IP2K series.
1033
1034 @table @gcctabopt
1035
1036 @item -mip2022ext
1037 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1038
1039 @item -mip2022
1040 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1041 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1042
1043 @end table
1044 @end ifset
1045
1046 @ifset M32C
1047 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1048 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1049
1050 @table @gcctabopt
1051
1052 @item -m32c
1053 Assemble M32C instructions.
1054
1055 @item -m16c
1056 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1057
1058 @item -relax
1059 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1060
1061 @item -h-tick-hex
1062 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1063
1064 @end table
1065 @end ifset
1066
1067 @ifset M32R
1068 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1069 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1070
1071 @table @gcctabopt
1072
1073 @item --m32rx
1074 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1075 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1076
1077 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1078 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1079 encountered.
1080
1081 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1082 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1083 encountered.
1084
1085 @end table
1086 @end ifset
1087
1088 @ifset M680X0
1089 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1090 Motorola 68000 series.
1091
1092 @table @gcctabopt
1093
1094 @item -l
1095 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1096
1097 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1098 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1099 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1100 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1101 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1102
1103 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1104 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1105 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1106 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1107 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1108 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1109
1110 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1111 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1112 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1113
1114 @end table
1115 @end ifset
1116
1117 @ifset NIOSII
1118
1119 @ifclear man
1120 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1121 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1122 @end ifclear
1123
1124 @ifset man
1125 @c man begin OPTIONS
1126 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1127 Altera Nios II processor.
1128 @c man end
1129 @c man begin INCLUDE
1130 @include c-nios2.texi
1131 @c ended inside the included file
1132 @end ifset
1133 @end ifset
1134
1135 @ifset PDP11
1136
1137 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1138 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1139
1140 @table @gcctabopt
1141 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1142 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1143 default is @option{-mpic}.
1144
1145 @item -mall
1146 @itemx -mall-extensions
1147 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1148
1149 @item -mno-extensions
1150 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1151
1152 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1153 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1154
1155 @item -m@var{cpu}
1156 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1157 disable all other extensions.
1158
1159 @item -m@var{machine}
1160 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1161 model, and disable all other extensions.
1162 @end table
1163
1164 @end ifset
1165
1166 @ifset PJ
1167 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1168 a picoJava processor.
1169
1170 @table @gcctabopt
1171
1172 @cindex PJ endianness
1173 @cindex endianness, PJ
1174 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1175 @item -mb
1176 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1177
1178 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1179 @item -ml
1180 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1181
1182 @end table
1183 @end ifset
1184
1185 @ifset M68HC11
1186 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1187 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1188
1189 @table @gcctabopt
1190
1191 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1192 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1193 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1194
1195 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1196 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1197 XGATE address space.
1198
1199 @item -mshort
1200 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1201
1202 @item -mlong
1203 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1204
1205 @item -mshort-double
1206 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1207
1208 @item -mlong-double
1209 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1210
1211 @item --force-long-branches
1212 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1213 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1214 sub routine.
1215
1216 @item -S | --short-branches
1217 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1218 when the offset is out of range.
1219
1220 @item --strict-direct-mode
1221 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1222 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1223
1224 @item --print-insn-syntax
1225 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1226
1227 @item --print-opcodes
1228 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1229
1230 @item --generate-example
1231 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1232 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1233
1234 @end table
1235 @end ifset
1236
1237 @ifset SPARC
1238 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1239 for the SPARC architecture:
1240
1241 @table @gcctabopt
1242 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1243 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1244 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1245
1246 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1247 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1248
1249 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1250 UltraSPARC extensions.
1251
1252 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1253 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1254 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1255
1256 @item -bump
1257 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1258 @end table
1259 @end ifset
1260
1261 @ifset TIC54X
1262 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1263 architecture.
1264
1265 @table @gcctabopt
1266 @item -mfar-mode
1267 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1268 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1269 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1270 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1271 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1272 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1273 behaviour in the shell.
1274 @end table
1275 @end ifset
1276
1277 @ifset MIPS
1278 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1279 a MIPS processor.
1280
1281 @table @gcctabopt
1282 @item -G @var{num}
1283 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1284 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1285 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1286
1287 @cindex MIPS endianness
1288 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1289 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1290 @item -EB
1291 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1292
1293 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1294 @item -EL
1295 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1296
1297 @cindex MIPS ISA
1298 @item -mips1
1299 @itemx -mips2
1300 @itemx -mips3
1301 @itemx -mips4
1302 @itemx -mips5
1303 @itemx -mips32
1304 @itemx -mips32r2
1305 @itemx -mips32r3
1306 @itemx -mips32r5
1307 @itemx -mips32r6
1308 @itemx -mips64
1309 @itemx -mips64r2
1310 @itemx -mips64r3
1311 @itemx -mips64r5
1312 @itemx -mips64r6
1313 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1314 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1315 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1316 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1317 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1318 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1319 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1320 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1321 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1322 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1323
1324 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1325 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1326
1327 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1328 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1329
1330 @item -mfix7000
1331 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1332 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1333 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1334
1335 @item -mfix-rm7000
1336 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1337 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1338 followed by a load instruction.
1339
1340 @item -mdebug
1341 @itemx -no-mdebug
1342 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1343 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1344
1345 @item -mpdr
1346 @itemx -mno-pdr
1347 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1348
1349 @item -mgp32
1350 @itemx -mfp32
1351 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1352 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1353 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1354 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1355
1356 @item -mgp64
1357 @itemx -mfp64
1358 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1359 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1360 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1361 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1362
1363 @item -mfpxx
1364 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1365 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1366 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1367 32 or 64 bits wide.
1368
1369 @item -modd-spreg
1370 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1371 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1372 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1373 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1374
1375 @item -mips16
1376 @itemx -no-mips16
1377 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1378 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1379 turns off this option.
1380
1381 @item -mmicromips
1382 @itemx -mno-micromips
1383 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1384 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1385 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1386 at the start of the assembly file.
1387
1388 @item -msmartmips
1389 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1390 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1391 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1392 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1393
1394 @item -mips3d
1395 @itemx -no-mips3d
1396 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1397 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1398 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1399
1400 @item -mdmx
1401 @itemx -no-mdmx
1402 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1403 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1404 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1405
1406 @item -mdsp
1407 @itemx -mno-dsp
1408 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1409 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1410 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1411
1412 @item -mdspr2
1413 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1414 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1415 This option implies -mdsp.
1416 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1417 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1418
1419 @item -mmsa
1420 @itemx -mno-msa
1421 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1422 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1423 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1424
1425 @item -mxpa
1426 @itemx -mno-xpa
1427 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1428 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1429 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1430
1431 @item -mmt
1432 @itemx -mno-mt
1433 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1434 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1435 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1436
1437 @item -mmcu
1438 @itemx -mno-mcu
1439 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1440 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1441 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1442
1443 @item -minsn32
1444 @itemx -mno-insn32
1445 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1446 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1447 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1448 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1449 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1450 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1451 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1452
1453 @item --construct-floats
1454 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1455 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1456 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1457 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1458 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1459 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1460
1461 @item --relax-branch
1462 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1463 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1464 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1465 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1466
1467 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1468 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1469 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1470
1471 @cindex emulation
1472 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1473 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1474 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1475 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1476 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1477
1478 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1479 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1480 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1481 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1482 preferred options instead.
1483
1484 @item -nocpp
1485 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1486 the native tools.
1487
1488 @item --trap
1489 @itemx --no-trap
1490 @itemx --break
1491 @itemx --no-break
1492 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1493 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1494 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1495 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1496 break exception.
1497
1498 @item -n
1499 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1500 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1501 @end table
1502 @end ifset
1503
1504 @ifset MCORE
1505 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1506 an MCore processor.
1507
1508 @table @gcctabopt
1509 @item -jsri2bsr
1510 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1511 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1512 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1513
1514 @item -sifilter
1515 @itemx -nosifilter
1516 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1517 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1518
1519 @item -relax
1520 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1521
1522 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1523 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1524 can be assembled.
1525
1526 @item -EB
1527 Assemble for a big endian target.
1528
1529 @item -EL
1530 Assemble for a little endian target.
1531
1532 @end table
1533 @end ifset
1534 @c man end
1535
1536 @ifset METAG
1537
1538 @ifclear man
1539 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1540 for a Meta processor.
1541 @end ifclear
1542
1543 @ifset man
1544 @c man begin OPTIONS
1545 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1546 Meta processor.
1547 @c man end
1548 @c man begin INCLUDE
1549 @include c-metag.texi
1550 @c ended inside the included file
1551 @end ifset
1552
1553 @end ifset
1554
1555 @c man begin OPTIONS
1556 @ifset MMIX
1557 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1558 @end ifset
1559
1560 @ifset NDS32
1561
1562 @ifclear man
1563 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1564 for a NDS32 processor.
1565 @end ifclear
1566 @c ended inside the included file
1567 @end ifset
1568
1569 @ifset man
1570 @c man begin OPTIONS
1571 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1572 NDS32 processor.
1573 @c man end
1574 @c man begin INCLUDE
1575 @include c-nds32.texi
1576 @c ended inside the included file
1577 @end ifset
1578
1579 @c man end
1580 @ifset PPC
1581
1582 @ifclear man
1583 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1584 for a PowerPC processor.
1585 @end ifclear
1586
1587 @ifset man
1588 @c man begin OPTIONS
1589 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1590 PowerPC processor.
1591 @c man end
1592 @c man begin INCLUDE
1593 @include c-ppc.texi
1594 @c ended inside the included file
1595 @end ifset
1596
1597 @end ifset
1598
1599 @c man begin OPTIONS
1600 @ifset RX
1601 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1602 @end ifset
1603
1604 @ifset S390
1605 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1606 processor family.
1607
1608 @table @gcctabopt
1609 @item -m31
1610 @itemx -m64
1611 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1612 @item -mesa
1613 @item -mzarch
1614 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1615 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1616 @item -march=@var{processor}
1617 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1618 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1619 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1620 @item -mregnames
1621 @itemx -mno-regnames
1622 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1623 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1624 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1625 but evaluates to zero.
1626 @end table
1627 @end ifset
1628 @c man end
1629
1630 @ifset TIC6X
1631
1632 @ifclear man
1633 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1634 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1635 @end ifclear
1636
1637 @ifset man
1638 @c man begin OPTIONS
1639 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1640 TMS320C6000 processor.
1641 @c man end
1642 @c man begin INCLUDE
1643 @include c-tic6x.texi
1644 @c ended inside the included file
1645 @end ifset
1646
1647 @end ifset
1648
1649 @ifset TILEGX
1650
1651 @ifclear man
1652 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1653 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1654 @end ifclear
1655
1656 @ifset man
1657 @c man begin OPTIONS
1658 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1659 processor.
1660 @c man end
1661 @c man begin INCLUDE
1662 @include c-tilegx.texi
1663 @c ended inside the included file
1664 @end ifset
1665
1666 @end ifset
1667
1668 @ifset VISIUM
1669
1670 @ifclear man
1671 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1672 for a Visium processor.
1673 @end ifclear
1674
1675 @ifset man
1676 @c man begin OPTIONS
1677 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1678 processor.
1679 @c man end
1680 @c man begin INCLUDE
1681 @include c-visium.texi
1682 @c ended inside the included file
1683 @end ifset
1684
1685 @end ifset
1686
1687 @ifset XTENSA
1688
1689 @ifclear man
1690 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1691 for an Xtensa processor.
1692 @end ifclear
1693
1694 @ifset man
1695 @c man begin OPTIONS
1696 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1697 Xtensa processor.
1698 @c man end
1699 @c man begin INCLUDE
1700 @include c-xtensa.texi
1701 @c ended inside the included file
1702 @end ifset
1703
1704 @end ifset
1705
1706 @c man begin OPTIONS
1707
1708 @ifset Z80
1709 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1710 a Z80 family processor.
1711 @table @gcctabopt
1712 @item -z80
1713 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1714 @item -r800
1715 Assemble for R800 processor.
1716 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1717 @itemx -Wnud
1718 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1719 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1720 @itemx -Wnup
1721 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1722 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1723 @itemx -Wud
1724 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1725 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1726 @itemx -Wup
1727 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1728 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1729 @itemx -Fud
1730 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1731 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1732 @itemx -Fup
1733 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1734 @end table
1735 @end ifset
1736
1737 @c man end
1738
1739 @menu
1740 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1741 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1742 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1743 * Command Line:: Command Line
1744 * Input Files:: Input Files
1745 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1746 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1747 @end menu
1748
1749 @node Manual
1750 @section Structure of this Manual
1751
1752 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1753 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1754 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1755 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1756 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1757
1758 @ifclear GENERIC
1759 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1760 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1761 @end ifclear
1762 @ifset GENERIC
1763 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1764 various flavors of the assembler.
1765 @end ifset
1766
1767 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1768 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1769 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1770 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1771 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1772 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1773 particular architecture.
1774 @ifset GENERIC
1775 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1776 machine architecture manual for this information.
1777 @end ifset
1778 @ifclear GENERIC
1779 @ifset H8/300
1780 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1781 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1782 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1783 @end ifset
1784 @ifset SH
1785 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1786 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1787 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1788 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1789 @end ifset
1790 @ifset Z8000
1791 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1792 @end ifset
1793 @end ifclear
1794
1795 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1796 @ignore
1797 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1798 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1799 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1800 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1801 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1802 qualification.
1803
1804 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1805 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1806 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1807 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1808 @end ignore
1809
1810 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1811 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1812 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1813 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1814 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1815 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1816 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1817 @c directives).
1818
1819 @node GNU Assembler
1820 @section The GNU Assembler
1821
1822 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1823
1824 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1825 @ifclear GENERIC
1826 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1827 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1828 @end ifclear
1829 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1830 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1831 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1832 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1833 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1834
1835 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1836 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1837 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1838 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1839 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1840 machine would assemble.
1841 @ifset VAX
1842 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1843 @end ifset
1844 @ifset M680X0
1845 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1846 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1847 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1848 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1849 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1850 @end ifset
1851
1852 @c man end
1853
1854 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1855 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1856 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1857
1858 @node Object Formats
1859 @section Object File Formats
1860
1861 @cindex object file format
1862 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1863 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1864 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1865 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1866 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1867 @ifclear GENERIC
1868 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1869 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1870 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1871 @end ifclear
1872 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1873 @ifset I960
1874 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1875 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1876 @end ifset
1877 @ifset HPPA
1878 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1879 SOM or ELF format object files.
1880 @end ifset
1881 @end ifclear
1882
1883 @node Command Line
1884 @section Command Line
1885
1886 @cindex command line conventions
1887
1888 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1889 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1890 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1891 significant.
1892
1893 @cindex standard input, as input file
1894 @kindex --
1895 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1896 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1897
1898 @cindex options, command line
1899 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1900 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1901 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1902 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1903 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1904
1905 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1906 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1907 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1908 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1909
1910 @smallexample
1911 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1912 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1913 @end smallexample
1914
1915 @node Input Files
1916 @section Input Files
1917
1918 @cindex input
1919 @cindex source program
1920 @cindex files, input
1921 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1922 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1923 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1924 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1925
1926 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1927 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1928 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1929 order specified.
1930
1931 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1932 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1933 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1934 (The standard input is also a file.)
1935
1936 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1937 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1938 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1939 is taken to be an input file name.
1940
1941 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1942 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1943 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1944 to assemble.
1945
1946 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1947 in your command line.
1948
1949 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1950 file.
1951
1952 @c man end
1953
1954 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1955
1956 @cindex input file linenumbers
1957 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1958 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1959 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1960 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1961 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1962
1963 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1964 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1965
1966 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1967 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1968 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1969 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1970 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1971 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1972
1973 @node Object
1974 @section Output (Object) File
1975
1976 @cindex object file
1977 @cindex output file
1978 @kindex a.out
1979 @kindex .o
1980 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1981 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1982 is the object file. Its default name is
1983 @ifclear BOUT
1984 @code{a.out}.
1985 @end ifclear
1986 @ifset BOUT
1987 @ifset GENERIC
1988 @code{a.out}, or
1989 @end ifset
1990 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1991 @end ifset
1992 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1993 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1994 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1995 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1996 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1997
1998 @cindex linker
1999 @kindex ld
2000 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2001 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2002 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2003 information for the debugger.
2004
2005 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2006 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2007
2008 @node Errors
2009 @section Error and Warning Messages
2010
2011 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2012
2013 @cindex error messages
2014 @cindex warning messages
2015 @cindex messages from assembler
2016 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2017 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2018 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2019 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2020 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2021
2022 @c man end
2023
2024 @cindex format of warning messages
2025 Warning messages have the format
2026
2027 @smallexample
2028 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2029 @end smallexample
2030
2031 @noindent
2032 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2033 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2034 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2035 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2036 @ifset GENERIC
2037 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2038 @end ifset
2039 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2040 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2041 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2042 tradition).
2043
2044 @cindex format of error messages
2045 Error messages have the format
2046 @smallexample
2047 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2048 @end smallexample
2049 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2050 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2051 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2052
2053 @node Invoking
2054 @chapter Command-Line Options
2055
2056 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2057 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2058 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2059 for options specific
2060 @ifclear GENERIC
2061 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2062 @end ifclear
2063 @ifset GENERIC
2064 to particular machine architectures.
2065 @end ifset
2066
2067 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2068
2069 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2070 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2071 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2072 by commas. For example:
2073
2074 @smallexample
2075 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2076 @end smallexample
2077
2078 @noindent
2079 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2080 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2081 local symbols in the symbol table).
2082
2083 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2084 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2085 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2086 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2087 assembler.)
2088
2089 @c man end
2090
2091 @menu
2092 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2093 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2094 * D:: -D for compatibility
2095 * f:: -f to work faster
2096 * I:: -I for .include search path
2097 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2098 * K:: -K for compatibility
2099 @end ifclear
2100 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2101 * K:: -K for difference tables
2102 @end ifset
2103
2104 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2105 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2106 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2107 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2108 * o:: -o to name the object file
2109 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2110 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2111 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2112 * v:: -v to announce version
2113 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2114 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2115 @end menu
2116
2117 @node a
2118 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2119
2120 @kindex -a
2121 @kindex -ac
2122 @kindex -ad
2123 @kindex -ag
2124 @kindex -ah
2125 @kindex -al
2126 @kindex -an
2127 @kindex -as
2128 @cindex listings, enabling
2129 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2130
2131 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2132 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2133 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2134 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2135 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2136 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2137 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2138 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2139 also.
2140
2141 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2142 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2143
2144 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2145 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2146 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2147 omitted from the listing.
2148
2149 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2150 listing.
2151
2152 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2153 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2154 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2155 @code{.sbttl}.
2156 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2157 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2158 listing-control directives have no effect.
2159
2160 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2161 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2162
2163 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2164 because it
2165 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2166 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2167 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2168 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2169 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2170
2171 @node alternate
2172 @section @option{--alternate}
2173
2174 @kindex --alternate
2175 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2176
2177 @node D
2178 @section @option{-D}
2179
2180 @kindex -D
2181 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2182 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2183 @command{@value{AS}}.
2184
2185 @node f
2186 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2187
2188 @kindex -f
2189 @cindex trusted compiler
2190 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2191 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2192 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2193 and comment preprocessing on
2194 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2195 ,Preprocessing}.
2196
2197 @quotation
2198 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2199 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2200 not work correctly.
2201 @end quotation
2202
2203 @node I
2204 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2205
2206 @kindex -I @var{path}
2207 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2208 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2209 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2210 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2211 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2212 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2213 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2214 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2215 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2216 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2217
2218 @node K
2219 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2220
2221 @kindex -K
2222 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2223 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2224 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2225 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2226 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2227 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2228 alteration on other platforms.
2229 @end ifclear
2230
2231 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2232 @cindex difference tables, warning
2233 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2234 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2235 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2236 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2237 is done.
2238 @end ifset
2239
2240 @node L
2241 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2242
2243 @kindex -L
2244 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2245 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2246 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2247 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2248 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2249 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2250 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2251 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2252
2253 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2254 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2255 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2256
2257 @node listing
2258 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2259
2260 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2261 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2262 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2263 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2264 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2265 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2266 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2267 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2268
2269 @table @gcctabopt
2270 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2271 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2272 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2273 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2274 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2275
2276 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2277 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2278 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2279 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2280 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2281 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2282 switch is used the default is to one.
2283
2284 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2285 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2286 @cindex Width of source line output
2287 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2288 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2289 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2290
2291 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2292 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2293 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2294 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2295 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2296 @end table
2297
2298 @node M
2299 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2300
2301 @kindex -M
2302 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2303 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2304 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2305 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2306 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2307 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2308 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2309 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2310 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2311
2312 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2313 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2314 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2315 individually. These are:
2316
2317 @itemize @bullet
2318 @item global symbols in common section
2319
2320 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2321 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2322 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2323 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2324 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2325
2326 @item complex relocations
2327
2328 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2329 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2330 are not support by other object file formats.
2331
2332 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2333
2334 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2335 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2336 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2337 script.
2338
2339 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2340
2341 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2342 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2343
2344 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2345
2346 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2347 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2348 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2349 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2350 assigned within a linker script.
2351 @end itemize
2352
2353 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2354 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2355 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2356
2357 @itemize @bullet
2358
2359 @item EBCDIC strings
2360
2361 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2362
2363 @item packed binary coded decimal
2364
2365 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2366 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2367
2368 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2369
2370 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2371
2372 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2373
2374 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2375
2376 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2377
2378 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2379 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2380 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2381 these options serve no purpose.
2382
2383 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2384
2385 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2386 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2387 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2388
2389 @item other @code{OPT} options
2390
2391 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2392 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2393
2394 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2395
2396 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2397 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2398
2399 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2400
2401 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2402
2403 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2404
2405 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2406
2407 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2408
2409 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2410
2411 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2412
2413 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2414
2415 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2416
2417 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2418
2419 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2420
2421 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2422
2423 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2424
2425 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2426
2427 @end itemize
2428
2429 @node MD
2430 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2431
2432 @kindex --MD
2433 @cindex dependency tracking
2434 @cindex make rules
2435
2436 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2437 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2438 dependencies of the main source file.
2439
2440 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2441
2442 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2443
2444 @node o
2445 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2446
2447 @kindex -o
2448 @cindex naming object file
2449 @cindex object file name
2450 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2451 default it has the name
2452 @ifset GENERIC
2453 @ifset I960
2454 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2455 @end ifset
2456 @ifclear I960
2457 @file{a.out}.
2458 @end ifclear
2459 @end ifset
2460 @ifclear GENERIC
2461 @ifset I960
2462 @file{b.out}.
2463 @end ifset
2464 @ifclear I960
2465 @file{a.out}.
2466 @end ifclear
2467 @end ifclear
2468 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2469 object file a different name.
2470
2471 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2472 existing file of the same name.
2473
2474 @node R
2475 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2476
2477 @kindex -R
2478 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2479 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2480 @cindex joining text and data sections
2481 @cindex merging text and data sections
2482 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2483 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2484 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2485 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2486 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2487 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2488
2489 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2490 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2491 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2492 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2493
2494 @ifset COFF-ELF
2495 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2496 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2497 @samp{.data}.
2498 @end ifset
2499
2500 @ifset HPPA
2501 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2502 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2503 @end ifset
2504
2505 @node statistics
2506 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2507
2508 @kindex --statistics
2509 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2510 @cindex time, total for assembly
2511 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2512 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2513 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2514 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2515 seconds).
2516
2517 @node traditional-format
2518 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2519
2520 @kindex --traditional-format
2521 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2522 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2523 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2524
2525 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2526 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2527
2528 @node v
2529 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2530
2531 @kindex -v
2532 @kindex -version
2533 @cindex assembler version
2534 @cindex version of assembler
2535 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2536 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2537 command line.
2538
2539 @node W
2540 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2541
2542 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2543 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2544 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2545 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2546
2547 @kindex -W
2548 @kindex --no-warn
2549 @cindex suppressing warnings
2550 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2551 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2552 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2553 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2554 are still reported.
2555
2556 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2557 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2558 @cindex warnings, causing error
2559 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2560 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2561
2562 @kindex --warn
2563 @cindex warnings, switching on
2564 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2565 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2566
2567 @node Z
2568 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2569 @cindex object file, after errors
2570 @cindex errors, continuing after
2571 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2572 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2573 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2574 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2575 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2576 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2577
2578 @node Syntax
2579 @chapter Syntax
2580
2581 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2582 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2583 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2584 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2585 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2586 @ifclear VAX
2587 assembler.
2588 @end ifclear
2589 @ifset VAX
2590 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2591 @end ifset
2592
2593 @menu
2594 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2595 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2596 * Comments:: Comments
2597 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2598 * Statements:: Statements
2599 * Constants:: Constants
2600 @end menu
2601
2602 @node Preprocessing
2603 @section Preprocessing
2604
2605 @cindex preprocessing
2606 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2607 @itemize @bullet
2608 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2609 @item
2610 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2611 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2612 a single space.
2613
2614 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2615 @item
2616 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2617 appropriate number of newlines.
2618
2619 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2620 @item
2621 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2622 @end itemize
2623
2624 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2625 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2626 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2627 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2628 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2629 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2630 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2631
2632 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2633 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2634 preprocessed.
2635
2636 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2637 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2638 @kindex #NO_APP
2639 @kindex #APP
2640 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2641 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2642 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2643 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2644 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2645 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2646 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2647 and whitespace.
2648
2649 @node Whitespace
2650 @section Whitespace
2651
2652 @cindex whitespace
2653 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2654 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2655 people to read. Unless within character constants
2656 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2657 as exactly one space.
2658
2659 @node Comments
2660 @section Comments
2661
2662 @cindex comments
2663 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2664 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2665
2666 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2667 This means you may not nest these comments.
2668
2669 @smallexample
2670 /*
2671 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2672 is to use this sort of comment.
2673 */
2674
2675 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2676 @end smallexample
2677
2678 @cindex line comment character
2679 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2680 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2681 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2682 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2683 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2684 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2685 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2686 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2687
2688 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2689 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2690 to specify logical line numbers:
2691
2692 @kindex #
2693 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2694 @cindex logical line numbers
2695 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2696 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2697 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2698 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2699 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2700
2701 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2702 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2703
2704 @smallexample
2705 # This is an ordinary comment.
2706 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2707 # This is logical line # 36.
2708 @end smallexample
2709 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2710 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2711
2712 @node Symbol Intro
2713 @section Symbols
2714
2715 @cindex characters used in symbols
2716 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2717 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2718 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2719 @samp{_.$}.
2720 @end ifclear
2721 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2722 @ifclear GENERIC
2723 @ifset H8
2724 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2725 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2726 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2727 symbol names.)
2728 @end ifset
2729 @end ifclear
2730 @end ifset
2731 @ifset GENERIC
2732 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2733 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2734 @end ifset
2735 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2736 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2737 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2738 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2739 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2740 @cindex length of symbols
2741
2742 @node Statements
2743 @section Statements
2744
2745 @cindex statements, structure of
2746 @cindex line separator character
2747 @cindex statement separator character
2748
2749 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2750 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2751 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2752 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2753 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2754 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2755 exception: they do not end statements.
2756
2757 @cindex newline, required at file end
2758 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2759 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2760 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2761
2762 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2763
2764 @cindex instructions and directives
2765 @cindex directives and instructions
2766 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2767 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2768 @c 13feb91.
2769 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2770 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2771 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2772 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2773 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2774 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2775 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2776 @ifset GENERIC
2777 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2778 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2779 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2780 language.@refill
2781 @end ifset
2782
2783 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2784 @cindex label (@code{:})
2785 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2786 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2787 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2788
2789 @ifset HPPA
2790 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2791 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2792 only one label may be defined on each line.
2793 @end ifset
2794
2795 @smallexample
2796 label: .directive followed by something
2797 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2798 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2799 @end smallexample
2800
2801 @node Constants
2802 @section Constants
2803
2804 @cindex constants
2805 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2806 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2807 @smallexample
2808 @group
2809 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2810 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2811 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2812 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2813 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2814 @end group
2815 @end smallexample
2816
2817 @menu
2818 * Characters:: Character Constants
2819 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2820 @end menu
2821
2822 @node Characters
2823 @subsection Character Constants
2824
2825 @cindex character constants
2826 @cindex constants, character
2827 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2828 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2829 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2830 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2831 used in arithmetic expressions.
2832
2833 @menu
2834 * Strings:: Strings
2835 * Chars:: Characters
2836 @end menu
2837
2838 @node Strings
2839 @subsubsection Strings
2840
2841 @cindex string constants
2842 @cindex constants, string
2843 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2844 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2845 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2846 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2847 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2848 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2849 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2850 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2851
2852 @cindex escape codes, character
2853 @cindex character escape codes
2854 @table @kbd
2855 @c @item \a
2856 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2857 @c
2858 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2859 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2860 @item \b
2861 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2862
2863 @c @item \e
2864 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2865 @c
2866 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2867 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2868 @item \f
2869 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2870
2871 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2872 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2873 @item \n
2874 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2875
2876 @c @item \p
2877 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2878 @c
2879 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2880 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2881 @item \r
2882 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2883
2884 @c @item \s
2885 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2886 @c other assemblers.
2887 @c
2888 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2889 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2890 @item \t
2891 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2892
2893 @c @item \v
2894 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2895 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2896 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2897 @c
2898 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2899 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2900 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2901 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2902 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2903 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2904
2905 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2906 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2907 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2908 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2909 lower case @code{x} works.
2910
2911 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2912 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2913 @item \\
2914 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2915
2916 @c @item \'
2917 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2918 @c This is needed in single character literals
2919 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2920 @c a @samp{'}.
2921 @c
2922 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2923 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2924 @item \"
2925 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2926 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2927
2928 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2929 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2930 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2931 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2932 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2933 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2934 code and warns you of the fact.
2935 @end table
2936
2937 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2938 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2939 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2940 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2941 sequence.
2942
2943 @node Chars
2944 @subsubsection Characters
2945
2946 @cindex single character constant
2947 @cindex character, single
2948 @cindex constant, single character
2949 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2950 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2951 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2952 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2953 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2954 grave accent. A newline
2955 @ifclear GENERIC
2956 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2957 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2958 @end ifclear
2959 @ifset abnormal-separator
2960 @ifset H8
2961 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2962 Renesas SH)
2963 @end ifset
2964 @end ifset
2965 @end ifclear
2966 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2967 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2968 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2969 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2970 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2971
2972 @node Numbers
2973 @subsection Number Constants
2974
2975 @cindex constants, number
2976 @cindex number constants
2977 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2978 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2979 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2980 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2981 are floating point numbers, described below.
2982
2983 @menu
2984 * Integers:: Integers
2985 * Bignums:: Bignums
2986 * Flonums:: Flonums
2987 @ifclear GENERIC
2988 @ifset I960
2989 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2990 @end ifset
2991 @end ifclear
2992 @end menu
2993
2994 @node Integers
2995 @subsubsection Integers
2996 @cindex integers
2997 @cindex constants, integer
2998
2999 @cindex binary integers
3000 @cindex integers, binary
3001 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3002 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3003
3004 @cindex octal integers
3005 @cindex integers, octal
3006 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3007 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3008
3009 @cindex decimal integers
3010 @cindex integers, decimal
3011 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3012 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3013
3014 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3015 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3016 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3017 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3018
3019 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3020 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3021 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3022
3023 @node Bignums
3024 @subsubsection Bignums
3025
3026 @cindex bignums
3027 @cindex constants, bignum
3028 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3029 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3030 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3031 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3032
3033 @node Flonums
3034 @subsubsection Flonums
3035 @cindex flonums
3036 @cindex floating point numbers
3037 @cindex constants, floating point
3038
3039 @cindex precision, floating point
3040 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3041 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3042 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3043 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3044 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3045 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3046
3047 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3048 @itemize @bullet
3049 @item
3050 The digit @samp{0}.
3051 @ifset HPPA
3052 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3053 @end ifset
3054
3055 @item
3056 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3057 @ifset GENERIC
3058 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3059 @ignore
3060 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3061 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3062 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3063 @end ignore
3064
3065 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3066 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3067 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3068
3069 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3070 (in upper or lower case).
3071
3072 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3073 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3074
3075 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3076 @end ifset
3077 @ifclear GENERIC
3078 @ifset ARC
3079 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3080 @end ifset
3081 @ifset H8
3082 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3083 @end ifset
3084 @ifset HPPA
3085 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3086 @end ifset
3087 @ifset I960
3088 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3089 @end ifset
3090 @end ifclear
3091
3092 @item
3093 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3094
3095 @item
3096 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3097
3098 @item
3099 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3100 or more decimal digits.
3101
3102 @item
3103 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3104
3105 @itemize @bullet
3106 @item
3107 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3108 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3109 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3110 @item
3111 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3112 @item
3113 One or more decimal digits.
3114 @end itemize
3115
3116 @end itemize
3117
3118 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3119 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3120
3121 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3122 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3123 @command{@value{AS}}.
3124
3125 @ifclear GENERIC
3126 @ifset I960
3127 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3128 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3129 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3130 @node Bit Fields
3131 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3132
3133 @cindex bit fields
3134 @cindex constants, bit field
3135 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3136 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3137 @example
3138 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3139 @end example
3140 @noindent
3141 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3142 @var{value}.
3143
3144 The resulting number is then packed
3145 @ifset GENERIC
3146 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3147 (in host-dependent byte order)
3148 @end ifset
3149 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3150 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3151 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3152 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3153 least significant digits.@refill
3154
3155 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3156 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3157 @end ifset
3158 @end ifclear
3159
3160 @node Sections
3161 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3162 @cindex sections
3163 @cindex relocation
3164
3165 @menu
3166 * Secs Background:: Background
3167 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3168 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3169 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3170 * bss:: bss Section
3171 @end menu
3172
3173 @node Secs Background
3174 @section Background
3175
3176 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3177 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3178 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3179
3180 @cindex linker, and assembler
3181 @cindex assembler, and linker
3182 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3183 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3184 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3185 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3186 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3187 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3188 sections.
3189
3190 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3191 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3192 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3193 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3194 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3195 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3196 the proper run-time addresses.
3197 @ifset H8
3198 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3199 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3200 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3201 @end ifset
3202
3203 @cindex standard assembler sections
3204 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3205 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3206 @dfn{bss} sections.
3207
3208 @ifset COFF-ELF
3209 @ifset GENERIC
3210 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3211 @end ifset
3212 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3213 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3214 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3215 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3216 @end ifset
3217
3218 @ifset HPPA
3219 @ifset GENERIC
3220 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3221 @end ifset
3222 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3223 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3224 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3225 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3226 assembler directives.
3227
3228 @ifset SOM
3229 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3230 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3231 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3232 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3233 @end ifset
3234 @end ifset
3235
3236 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3237 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3238
3239 @ifset HPPA
3240 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3241 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3242 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3243 @end ifset
3244
3245 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3246 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3247 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3248 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3249 file is mentioned:
3250 @itemize @bullet
3251 @item
3252 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3253 an address?
3254 @item
3255 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3256 @item
3257 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3258 @display
3259 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3260 @end display
3261 @item
3262 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3263 @end itemize
3264
3265 @cindex addresses, format of
3266 @cindex section-relative addressing
3267 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3268 @display
3269 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3270 @end display
3271 @noindent
3272 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3273 nature.
3274 @ifset SOM
3275 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3276 symbol-relative instead.)
3277 @end ifset
3278
3279 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3280 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3281
3282 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3283 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3284 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3285 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3286 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3287 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3288 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3289 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3290 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3291
3292 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3293 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3294 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3295 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3296 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3297 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3298 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3299
3300 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3301 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3302 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3303 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3304 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3305 data and bss sections.
3306
3307 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3308 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3309
3310 @node Ld Sections
3311 @section Linker Sections
3312 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3313
3314 @table @strong
3315
3316 @ifset COFF-ELF
3317 @cindex named sections
3318 @cindex sections, named
3319 @item named sections
3320 @end ifset
3321 @ifset aout-bout
3322 @cindex text section
3323 @cindex data section
3324 @itemx text section
3325 @itemx data section
3326 @end ifset
3327 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3328 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3329 true of another.
3330 @c @ifset aout-bout
3331 When the program is running, however, it is
3332 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3333 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3334 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3335 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3336 in the data section.
3337 @c @end ifset
3338
3339 @cindex bss section
3340 @item bss section
3341 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3342 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3343 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3344 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3345 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3346 those explicit zeros from object files.
3347
3348 @cindex absolute section
3349 @item absolute section
3350 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3351 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3352 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3353 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3354
3355 @cindex undefined section
3356 @item undefined section
3357 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3358 the preceding sections.
3359 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3360 @end table
3361
3362 @cindex relocation example
3363 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3364 @ifset COFF-ELF
3365 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3366 @end ifset
3367 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3368
3369 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3370 @ifnottex
3371 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3372 @smallexample
3373 +-----+----+--+
3374 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3375 +-----+----+--+
3376
3377 text data bss
3378 seg. seg. seg.
3379
3380 +---+---+---+
3381 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3382 +---+---+---+
3383
3384 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3385 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3386 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3387
3388 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3389 @end smallexample
3390 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3391 @end ifnottex
3392 @need 5000
3393 @tex
3394 \bigskip
3395 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3396 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3397 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3398
3399 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3400 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3401 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3402
3403 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3404 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3405 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3406 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3407 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3408
3409 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3410 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3411
3412 @end tex
3413 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3414
3415 @node As Sections
3416 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3417
3418 @cindex internal assembler sections
3419 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3420 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3421 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3422 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3423 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3424 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3425 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3426 section-relative address.
3427
3428 @table @b
3429 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3430 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3431 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3432 bug in the assembler.
3433
3434 @cindex expr (internal section)
3435 @item expr section
3436 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3437 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3438 it in the expr section.
3439 @c FIXME item debug
3440 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3441 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3442 @c FIXME item register
3443 @end table
3444
3445 @node Sub-Sections
3446 @section Sub-Sections
3447
3448 @cindex numbered subsections
3449 @cindex grouping data
3450 @ifset aout-bout
3451 Assembled bytes
3452 @ifset COFF-ELF
3453 conventionally
3454 @end ifset
3455 fall into two sections: text and data.
3456 @end ifset
3457 You may have separate groups of
3458 @ifset GENERIC
3459 data in named sections
3460 @end ifset
3461 @ifclear GENERIC
3462 @ifclear aout-bout
3463 data in named sections
3464 @end ifclear
3465 @ifset aout-bout
3466 text or data
3467 @end ifset
3468 @end ifclear
3469 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3470 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3471 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3472 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3473 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3474 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3475 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3476 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3477 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3478 constants being output.
3479
3480 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3481 goes in subsection number zero.
3482
3483 @ifset GENERIC
3484 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3485 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3486 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3487 @end ifset
3488 @ifclear GENERIC
3489 @ifset H8
3490 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3491 boundary (two bytes).
3492 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3493 @end ifset
3494 @ifset I960
3495 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3496 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3497 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3498 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3499 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3500 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3501 @end ifset
3502 @end ifclear
3503
3504 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3505 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3506 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3507 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3508 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3509 data subsections as a data section.
3510
3511 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3512 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3513 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3514 @ifset COFF
3515 @ifset GENERIC
3516 When generating COFF output, you
3517 @end ifset
3518 @ifclear GENERIC
3519 You
3520 @end ifclear
3521 can also use an extra subsection
3522 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3523 @var{expression}}.
3524 @end ifset
3525 @ifset ELF
3526 @ifset GENERIC
3527 When generating ELF output, you
3528 @end ifset
3529 @ifclear GENERIC
3530 You
3531 @end ifclear
3532 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3533 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3534 @end ifset
3535 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3536 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3537 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3538 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3539 @smallexample
3540 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3541 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3542 .text 1
3543 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3544 .data 0
3545 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3546 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3547 .text 0
3548 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3549 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3550 @end smallexample
3551
3552 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3553 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3554 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3555 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3556 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3557 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3558 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3559
3560 @node bss
3561 @section bss Section
3562
3563 @cindex bss section
3564 @cindex common variable storage
3565 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3566 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3567 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3568 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3569 section are zeroed bytes.
3570
3571 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3572 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3573
3574 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3575 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3576
3577 @ifset GENERIC
3578 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3579 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3580 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3581 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3582 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3583 @end ifset
3584
3585 @node Symbols
3586 @chapter Symbols
3587
3588 @cindex symbols
3589 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3590 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3591 to debug.
3592
3593 @quotation
3594 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3595 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3596 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3597 @end quotation
3598
3599 @menu
3600 * Labels:: Labels
3601 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3602 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3603 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3604 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3605 @end menu
3606
3607 @node Labels
3608 @section Labels
3609
3610 @cindex labels
3611 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3612 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3613 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3614 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3615 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3616 definitions.
3617
3618 @ifset HPPA
3619 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3620 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3621 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3622 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3623 @end ifset
3624
3625 @node Setting Symbols
3626 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3627
3628 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3629 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3630 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3631 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3632 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3633 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3634 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3635 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3636
3637 @ifset Blackfin
3638 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3639 @end ifset
3640
3641 @node Symbol Names
3642 @section Symbol Names
3643
3644 @cindex symbol names
3645 @cindex names, symbol
3646 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3647 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3648 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3649 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3650 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3651 particular target machine), and underscores.
3652 @end ifclear
3653 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3654 @ifset H8
3655 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3656 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3657 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3658 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3659 @end ifset
3660 @end ifset
3661
3662 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3663 than @code{Foo}.
3664
3665 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3666 Local Labels. See below.
3667
3668 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3669 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3670 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3671 currently supported.
3672
3673 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3674 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3675 in a program.
3676
3677 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3678
3679 @cindex local symbol names
3680 @cindex symbol names, local
3681 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3682 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3683 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3684 set of local label prefixes.
3685 @ifset HPPA
3686 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3687 @end ifset
3688
3689 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3690 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3691 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3692 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3693
3694 @subheading Local Labels
3695
3696 @cindex local labels
3697 @cindex temporary symbol names
3698 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3699 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3700 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3701 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3702 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3703 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any positive integer). To refer
3704 to the most recent previous definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using
3705 the same number as when you defined the label. To refer to the next definition
3706 of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards''
3707 and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3708
3709 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3710 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3711 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3712 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3713 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3714 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3715 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3716
3717 Here is an example:
3718
3719 @smallexample
3720 1: branch 1f
3721 2: branch 1b
3722 1: branch 2f
3723 2: branch 1b
3724 @end smallexample
3725
3726 Which is the equivalent of:
3727
3728 @smallexample
3729 label_1: branch label_3
3730 label_2: branch label_1
3731 label_3: branch label_4
3732 label_4: branch label_3
3733 @end smallexample
3734
3735 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3736 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3737 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3738 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3739 these parts:
3740
3741 @table @code
3742 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3743 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3744 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3745 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3746 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3747 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3748 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3749 you may use them in debugging.
3750
3751 @item @var{number}
3752 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3753 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3754
3755 @item @kbd{C-B}
3756 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3757 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3758
3759 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3760 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3761 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3762 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3763 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3764 @end table
3765
3766 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3767 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3768
3769 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3770 @cindex dollar local symbols
3771
3772 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3773 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3774 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3775 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3776 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3777 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3778
3779 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3780 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3781 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3782
3783 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3784 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3785 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3786 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3787
3788 @node Dot
3789 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3790
3791 @cindex dot (symbol)
3792 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3793 @cindex current address
3794 @cindex location counter
3795 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3796 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3797 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3798 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3799 directive.
3800 @ifclear no-space-dir
3801 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3802 @samp{.space 4}.
3803 @end ifclear
3804
3805 @node Symbol Attributes
3806 @section Symbol Attributes
3807
3808 @cindex symbol attributes
3809 @cindex attributes, symbol
3810 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3811 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3812 attributes.
3813 @ifset INTERNALS
3814 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3815 @end ifset
3816
3817 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3818 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3819 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3820 would want.
3821
3822 @menu
3823 * Symbol Value:: Value
3824 * Symbol Type:: Type
3825 @ifset aout-bout
3826 @ifset GENERIC
3827 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3828 @end ifset
3829 @ifclear GENERIC
3830 @ifclear BOUT
3831 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3832 @end ifclear
3833 @ifset BOUT
3834 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3835 @end ifset
3836 @end ifclear
3837 @end ifset
3838 @ifset COFF
3839 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3840 @end ifset
3841 @ifset SOM
3842 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3843 @end ifset
3844 @end menu
3845
3846 @node Symbol Value
3847 @subsection Value
3848
3849 @cindex value of a symbol
3850 @cindex symbol value
3851 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3852 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3853 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3854 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3855 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3856 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3857 called absolute.
3858
3859 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3860 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3861 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3862 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3863 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3864 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3865 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3866 allocated storage.
3867
3868 @node Symbol Type
3869 @subsection Type
3870
3871 @cindex type of a symbol
3872 @cindex symbol type
3873 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3874 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3875 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3876 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3877
3878 @ifset aout-bout
3879 @ifclear GENERIC
3880 @ifset BOUT
3881 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3882 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3883 @need 1000
3884 @node a.out Symbols
3885 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3886
3887 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3888 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3889 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3890 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3891 @code{b.out}.
3892
3893 @end ifset
3894 @ifclear BOUT
3895 @node a.out Symbols
3896 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3897
3898 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3899 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3900
3901 @end ifclear
3902 @end ifclear
3903 @ifset GENERIC
3904 @node a.out Symbols
3905 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3906
3907 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3908 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3909
3910 @end ifset
3911 @menu
3912 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3913 * Symbol Other:: Other
3914 @end menu
3915
3916 @node Symbol Desc
3917 @subsubsection Descriptor
3918
3919 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3920 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3921 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3922 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3923 @command{@value{AS}}.
3924
3925 @node Symbol Other
3926 @subsubsection Other
3927
3928 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3929 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3930 @end ifset
3931
3932 @ifset COFF
3933 @node COFF Symbols
3934 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3935
3936 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3937 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3938
3939 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3940 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3941 @code{.endef} directives.
3942
3943 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3944
3945 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3946 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3947 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3948
3949 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3950
3951 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3952 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3953 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3954 table information for COFF.
3955 @end ifset
3956
3957 @ifset SOM
3958 @node SOM Symbols
3959 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3960
3961 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3962 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3963
3964 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3965 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3966
3967 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3968 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3969 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3970 @end ifset
3971
3972 @node Expressions
3973 @chapter Expressions
3974
3975 @cindex expressions
3976 @cindex addresses
3977 @cindex numeric values
3978 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3979 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3980
3981 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3982 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3983 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3984 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3985 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3986 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3987
3988 @menu
3989 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3990 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3991 @end menu
3992
3993 @node Empty Exprs
3994 @section Empty Expressions
3995
3996 @cindex empty expressions
3997 @cindex expressions, empty
3998 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3999 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4000 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4001 is compatible with other assemblers.
4002
4003 @node Integer Exprs
4004 @section Integer Expressions
4005
4006 @cindex integer expressions
4007 @cindex expressions, integer
4008 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4009 by @emph{operators}.
4010
4011 @menu
4012 * Arguments:: Arguments
4013 * Operators:: Operators
4014 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4015 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4016 @end menu
4017
4018 @node Arguments
4019 @subsection Arguments
4020
4021 @cindex expression arguments
4022 @cindex arguments in expressions
4023 @cindex operands in expressions
4024 @cindex arithmetic operands
4025 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4026 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4027 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4028 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4029 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4030 instruction operands.
4031
4032 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4033 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4034 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4035 integer.
4036
4037 Numbers are usually integers.
4038
4039 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4040 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4041 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4042 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4043 assemblers.
4044
4045 @cindex subexpressions
4046 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4047 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4048 operator followed by an argument.
4049
4050 @node Operators
4051 @subsection Operators
4052
4053 @cindex operators, in expressions
4054 @cindex arithmetic functions
4055 @cindex functions, in expressions
4056 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4057 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4058 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4059 whitespace.
4060
4061 @node Prefix Ops
4062 @subsection Prefix Operator
4063
4064 @cindex prefix operators
4065 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4066 one argument, which must be absolute.
4067
4068 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4069 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4070 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4071 @tex
4072 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4073 @end tex
4074
4075 @table @code
4076 @item -
4077 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4078 @item ~
4079 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4080 @end table
4081
4082 @tex
4083 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4084 @end tex
4085
4086 @node Infix Ops
4087 @subsection Infix Operators
4088
4089 @cindex infix operators
4090 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4091 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4092 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4093 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4094 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4095
4096 @enumerate
4097 @cindex operator precedence
4098 @cindex precedence of operators
4099
4100 @item
4101 Highest Precedence
4102
4103 @table @code
4104 @item *
4105 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4106
4107 @item /
4108 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4109
4110 @item %
4111 @dfn{Remainder}.
4112
4113 @item <<
4114 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4115
4116 @item >>
4117 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4118 @end table
4119
4120 @item
4121 Intermediate precedence
4122
4123 @table @code
4124 @item |
4125
4126 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4127
4128 @item &
4129 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4130
4131 @item ^
4132 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4133
4134 @item !
4135 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4136 @end table
4137
4138 @item
4139 Low Precedence
4140
4141 @table @code
4142 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4143 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4144 @cindex arguments for addition
4145 @item +
4146 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4147 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4148 sections.
4149
4150 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4151 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4152 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4153 @item -
4154 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4155 result has the section of the left argument.
4156 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4157 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4158 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4159
4160 @cindex comparison expressions
4161 @cindex expressions, comparison
4162 @item ==
4163 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4164 @item <>
4165 @itemx !=
4166 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4167 @item <
4168 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4169 @item >
4170 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4171 @item >=
4172 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4173 @item <=
4174 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4175
4176 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4177 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4178 perform signed comparisons.
4179 @end table
4180
4181 @item Lowest Precedence
4182
4183 @table @code
4184 @item &&
4185 @dfn{Logical And}.
4186
4187 @item ||
4188 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4189
4190 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4191 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4192 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4193 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4194
4195 @end table
4196 @end enumerate
4197
4198 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4199 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4200
4201 @node Pseudo Ops
4202 @chapter Assembler Directives
4203
4204 @cindex directives, machine independent
4205 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4206 @cindex machine independent directives
4207 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4208 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4209 in lower case.
4210
4211 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4212 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4213 @ifset GENERIC
4214 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4215 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4216 @end ifset
4217 @ifclear GENERIC
4218 @ifset machine-directives
4219 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4220 @end ifset
4221 @end ifclear
4222
4223 @menu
4224 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4225 @ifset COFF
4226 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4227 @end ifset
4228
4229 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4230 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4231 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4232 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4233 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4234 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4235 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4236 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4237 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4238 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4239 @ifset COFF
4240 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4241 @end ifset
4242 @ifset aout-bout
4243 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4244 @end ifset
4245 @ifset COFF
4246 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4247 @end ifset
4248
4249 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4250 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4251 * Else:: @code{.else}
4252 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4253 * End:: @code{.end}
4254 @ifset COFF
4255 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4256 @end ifset
4257
4258 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4259 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4260 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4261 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4262 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4263 * Err:: @code{.err}
4264 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4265 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4266 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4267 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4268 * File:: @code{.file}
4269 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4270 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4271 * Func:: @code{.func}
4272 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4273 @ifset ELF
4274 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4275 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4276 @end ifset
4277
4278 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4279 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4280 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4281 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4282 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4283 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4284 @ifset ELF
4285 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4286 @end ifset
4287
4288 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4289 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4290 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4291 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4292 @ifclear no-line-dir
4293 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4294 @end ifclear
4295
4296 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4297 * List:: @code{.list}
4298 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4299 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4300 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4301 @ifset ELF
4302 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4303 @end ifset
4304
4305 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4306 @ignore
4307 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4308 @end ignore
4309
4310 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4311 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4312 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4313 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4314 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4315 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4316 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4317 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4318 @ifset ELF
4319 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4320 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4321 @end ifset
4322
4323 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4324 @ifset ELF
4325 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4326 @end ifset
4327
4328 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4329 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4330 @ifset ELF
4331 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4332 @end ifset
4333
4334 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4335 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4336 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4337 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4338 @ifset COFF
4339 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4340 @end ifset
4341 @ifset COFF-ELF
4342 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4343 @end ifset
4344
4345 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4346 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4347 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4348 @ifset COFF-ELF
4349 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4350 @end ifset
4351 @ifclear no-space-dir
4352 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4353 @end ifclear
4354
4355 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4356 @ifclear no-space-dir
4357 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4358 @end ifclear
4359 @ifset have-stabs
4360 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4361 @end ifset
4362
4363 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4364 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4365 @ifset ELF
4366 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4367 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4368 @end ifset
4369
4370 @ifset COFF
4371 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4372 @end ifset
4373
4374 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4375 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4376 @ifset COFF-ELF
4377 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4378 @end ifset
4379
4380 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4381 @ifset COFF
4382 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4383 @end ifset
4384
4385 @ifset ELF
4386 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4387 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4388 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4389 @end ifset
4390
4391 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4392 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4393 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4394 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4395 @ifclear no-space-dir
4396 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4397 @end ifclear
4398 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4399 @end menu
4400
4401 @node Abort
4402 @section @code{.abort}
4403
4404 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4405 @cindex stopping the assembly
4406 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4407 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4408 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4409 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4410 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4411
4412 @ifset COFF
4413 @node ABORT (COFF)
4414 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4415
4416 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4417 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4418 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4419
4420 @ifset BOUT
4421 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4422 but ignores it.
4423 @end ifset
4424 @end ifset
4425
4426 @node Align
4427 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4428
4429 @cindex padding the location counter
4430 @cindex @code{align} directive
4431 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4432 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4433 required, as described below.
4434
4435 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4436 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4437 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4438 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4439 with no-op instructions.
4440
4441 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4442 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4443 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4444 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4445 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4446 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4447 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4448
4449 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4450 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4451 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4452 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4453 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4454 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4455 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4456
4457 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4458 strongarm, it is the
4459 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4460 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4461 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4462 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4463
4464 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4465 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4466 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4467 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4468 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4469
4470 @node Altmacro
4471 @section @code{.altmacro}
4472 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4473
4474 @ftable @code
4475 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4476 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4477 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4478 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4479 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4480 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4481 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4482
4483 @item String delimiters
4484 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4485 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4486
4487 @table @code
4488 @item '@var{string}'
4489 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4490
4491 @item <@var{string}>
4492 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4493 @end table
4494
4495 @item single-character string escape
4496 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4497 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4498 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4499 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4500
4501 @item Expression results as strings
4502 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4503 and use the result as a string.
4504 @end ftable
4505
4506 @node Ascii
4507 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4508
4509 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4510 @cindex string literals
4511 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4512 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4513 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4514
4515 @node Asciz
4516 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4517
4518 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4519 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4520 @cindex null-terminated strings
4521 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4522 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4523
4524 @node Balign
4525 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4526
4527 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4528 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4529 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4530 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4531 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4532 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4533 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4534
4535 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4536 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4537 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4538 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4539 with no-op instructions.
4540
4541 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4542 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4543 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4544 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4545 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4546 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4547 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4548
4549 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4550 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4551 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4552 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4553 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4554 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4555 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4556 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4557 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4558 undefined.
4559
4560 @node Bundle directives
4561 @section Bundle directives
4562 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4563 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4564 @cindex bundle
4565 @cindex instruction bundle
4566 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4567 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4568 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4569 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4570 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4571 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4572 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4573
4574 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4575 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4576 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4577 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4578 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4579 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4580 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4581 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4582 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4583 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4584 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4585
4586 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4587 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4588 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4589 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4590 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4591 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4592 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4593 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4594 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4595
4596 @cindex bundle-locked
4597 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4598 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4599 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4600 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4601 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4602 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4603 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4604 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4605 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4606 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4607 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4608 bundle size.
4609
4610 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4611 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4612 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4613 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4614 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4615 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4616
4617 @node Byte
4618 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4619
4620 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4621 @cindex integers, one byte
4622 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4623 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4624
4625 @node CFI directives
4626 @section CFI directives
4627 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4628 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4629 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4630 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4631 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4632 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4633 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4634 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4635
4636 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4637 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4638
4639 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4640 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4641 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4642 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4643 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4644 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4645
4646 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4647 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4648
4649 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4650 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4651 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4652 unwind entry previously opened by
4653 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4654
4655 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4656 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4657 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4658 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4659 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4660 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4661 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4662 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4663 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4664 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4665 no personality routine.
4666
4667 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4668 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4669 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4670 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4671 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4672 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4673
4674 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4675 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4676 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4677 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4678 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4679 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4680 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4681 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4682
4683 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4684 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4685 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4686 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4687 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4688 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4689 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4690
4691 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4692 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4693 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4694 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4695 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4696 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4697
4698 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4699 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4700 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4701 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4702 by a section directive.
4703
4704 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4705 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4706 @code{.p2align} directive.
4707
4708 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4709 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4710 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4711
4712 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4713 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4714 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4715 remains the same.
4716
4717 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4718 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4719 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4720 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4721 CFA address.
4722
4723 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4724 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4725 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4726
4727 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4728 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4729 CFA.
4730
4731 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4732 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4733 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4734 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4735 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4736 code it's annotating.
4737
4738 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4739 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4740
4741 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4742 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4743 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4744 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4745
4746 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4747 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4748
4749 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4750 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4751 i.e. no restoration needed.
4752
4753 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4754 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4755 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4756 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4757 the previous saved state.
4758
4759 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4760 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4761 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4762
4763 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4764 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4765
4766 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4767 SPARC register window has been saved.
4768
4769 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4770 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4771 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4772 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4773
4774 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4775 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4776 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4777 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4778
4779 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4780 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4781 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4782 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4783 or another register.
4784
4785 @node Comm
4786 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4787
4788 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4789 @cindex symbol, common
4790 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4791 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4792 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4793 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4794 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4795 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4796 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4797 using the largest size.
4798
4799 @ifset COFF-ELF
4800 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4801 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4802 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4803 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4804 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4805 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4806 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4807 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4808 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4809 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4810 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4811 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4812 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4813 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4814 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4815 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4816 @end ifset
4817
4818 @ifset HPPA
4819 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4820 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4821 @end ifset
4822
4823 @node Data
4824 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4825
4826 @cindex @code{data} directive
4827 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4828 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4829 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4830 to zero.
4831
4832 @ifset COFF
4833 @node Def
4834 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4835
4836 @cindex @code{def} directive
4837 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4838 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4839 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4840 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4841 @ifset BOUT
4842
4843 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4844 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4845 but ignored.
4846 @end ifset
4847 @end ifset
4848
4849 @ifset aout-bout
4850 @node Desc
4851 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4852
4853 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4854 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4855 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4856 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4857 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4858
4859 @ifset COFF
4860 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4861 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4862 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4863 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4864 @end ifset
4865 @end ifset
4866
4867 @ifset COFF
4868 @node Dim
4869 @section @code{.dim}
4870
4871 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4872 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4873 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4874 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4875 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4876 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4877 @ifset BOUT
4878
4879 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4880 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4881 ignores it.
4882 @end ifset
4883 @end ifset
4884
4885 @node Double
4886 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4887
4888 @cindex @code{double} directive
4889 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4890 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4891 assembles floating point numbers.
4892 @ifset GENERIC
4893 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4894 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4895 @end ifset
4896 @ifclear GENERIC
4897 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4898 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4899 in @sc{ieee} format.
4900 @end ifset
4901 @end ifclear
4902
4903 @node Eject
4904 @section @code{.eject}
4905
4906 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4907 @cindex new page, in listings
4908 @cindex page, in listings
4909 @cindex listing control: new page
4910 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4911
4912 @node Else
4913 @section @code{.else}
4914
4915 @cindex @code{else} directive
4916 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4917 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4918 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4919 was false.
4920
4921 @node Elseif
4922 @section @code{.elseif}
4923
4924 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4925 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4926 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4927 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4928
4929 @node End
4930 @section @code{.end}
4931
4932 @cindex @code{end} directive
4933 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4934 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4935
4936 @ifset COFF
4937 @node Endef
4938 @section @code{.endef}
4939
4940 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4941 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4942 @code{.def}.
4943 @ifset BOUT
4944
4945 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4946 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4947 directive but ignores it.
4948 @end ifset
4949 @end ifset
4950
4951 @node Endfunc
4952 @section @code{.endfunc}
4953 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4954 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4955
4956 @node Endif
4957 @section @code{.endif}
4958
4959 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4960 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4961 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4962 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4963
4964 @node Equ
4965 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4966
4967 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4968 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4969 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4970 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4971 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4972
4973 @ifset HPPA
4974 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4975 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4976 @end ifset
4977
4978 @ifset Z80
4979 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4980 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4981 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4982 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4983 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4984 @end ifset
4985
4986 @node Equiv
4987 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4988 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4989 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4990 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4991 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4992 undefined.
4993
4994 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4995 @smallexample
4996 .ifdef SYM
4997 .err
4998 .endif
4999 .equ SYM,VAL
5000 @end smallexample
5001 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5002
5003 @node Eqv
5004 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5005 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5006 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5007 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5008 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5009 value is taken.
5010
5011 @node Err
5012 @section @code{.err}
5013 @cindex @code{err} directive
5014 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5015 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5016 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5017
5018 @node Error
5019 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5020 @cindex error directive
5021
5022 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5023 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5024 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5025 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5026
5027 @smallexample
5028 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5029 @end smallexample
5030
5031 @node Exitm
5032 @section @code{.exitm}
5033 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5034
5035 @node Extern
5036 @section @code{.extern}
5037
5038 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5039 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5040 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5041 all undefined symbols as external.
5042
5043 @node Fail
5044 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5045
5046 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5047 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5048 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5049 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5050 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5051 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5052
5053 @node File
5054 @section @code{.file}
5055 @cindex @code{file} directive
5056
5057 @ifclear no-file-dir
5058 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5059 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5060 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5061
5062 @subheading Default Version
5063
5064 @cindex logical file name
5065 @cindex file name, logical
5066 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5067 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5068
5069 @smallexample
5070 .file @var{string}
5071 @end smallexample
5072
5073 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5074 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5075 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5076 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5077 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5078
5079 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5080 @end ifclear
5081
5082 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5083 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5084
5085 @smallexample
5086 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5087 @end smallexample
5088
5089 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5090 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5091 literal.
5092
5093 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5094 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5095 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5096 entries will have.
5097
5098 @node Fill
5099 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5100
5101 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5102 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5103 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5104 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5105 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5106 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5107 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5108 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5109 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5110 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5111 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5112 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5113 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5114 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5115
5116 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5117 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5118 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5119 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5120
5121 @node Float
5122 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5123
5124 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5125 @cindex @code{float} directive
5126 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5127 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5128 @ifset GENERIC
5129 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5130 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5131 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5132 @end ifset
5133 @ifclear GENERIC
5134 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5135 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5136 in @sc{ieee} format.
5137 @end ifset
5138 @end ifclear
5139
5140 @node Func
5141 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5142 @cindex @code{func} directive
5143 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5144 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5145 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5146 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5147 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5148 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5149 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5150 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5151
5152 @node Global
5153 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5154
5155 @cindex @code{global} directive
5156 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5157 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5158 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5159 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5160 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5161 from another file linked into the same program.
5162
5163 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5164 compatibility with other assemblers.
5165
5166 @ifset HPPA
5167 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5168 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5169 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5170 @end ifset
5171
5172 @ifset ELF
5173 @node Gnu_attribute
5174 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5175 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5176
5177 @node Hidden
5178 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5179
5180 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5181 @cindex visibility
5182 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5183 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5184 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5185
5186 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5187 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5188 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5189 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5190 @end ifset
5191
5192 @node hword
5193 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5194
5195 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5196 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5197 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5198 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5199 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5200 a 16 bit number for each.
5201
5202 @ifset GENERIC
5203 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5204 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5205 @end ifset
5206 @ifclear GENERIC
5207 @ifset W32
5208 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5209 @end ifset
5210 @ifset W16
5211 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5212 @end ifset
5213 @end ifclear
5214
5215 @node Ident
5216 @section @code{.ident}
5217
5218 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5219
5220 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5221 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5222 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5223 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5224 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5225 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5226 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5227
5228 @node If
5229 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5230
5231 @cindex conditional assembly
5232 @cindex @code{if} directive
5233 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5234 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5235 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5236 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5237 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5238 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5239 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5240 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5241
5242 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5243 @table @code
5244 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5245 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5246 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5247 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5248 is considered to be undefined.
5249
5250 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5251 @item .ifb @var{text}
5252 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5253
5254 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5255 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5256 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5257 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5258 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5259 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5260 string comparison is case sensitive.
5261
5262 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5263 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5264 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5265
5266 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5267 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5268 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5269
5270 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5271 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5272 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5273 equal to zero.
5274
5275 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5276 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5277 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5278
5279 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5280 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5281 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5282 to zero.
5283
5284 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5285 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5286 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5287
5288 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5289 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5290 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5291 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5292
5293 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5294 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5295 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5296 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5297
5298 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5299 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5300 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5301 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5302 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5303 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5304 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5305
5306 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5307 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5308 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5309 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5310
5311 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5312 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5313 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5314 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5315 @end table
5316
5317 @node Incbin
5318 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5319
5320 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5321 @cindex binary files, including
5322 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5323 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5324 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5325 around @var{file}.
5326
5327 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5328 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5329 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5330 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5331 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5332
5333 @node Include
5334 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5335
5336 @cindex @code{include} directive
5337 @cindex supporting files, including
5338 @cindex files, including
5339 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5340 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5341 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5342 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5343 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5344 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5345 around @var{file}.
5346
5347 @node Int
5348 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5349
5350 @cindex @code{int} directive
5351 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5352 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5353 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5354 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5355 of target the assembly is for.
5356
5357 @ifclear GENERIC
5358 @ifset H8
5359 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5360 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5361 32-bit integers.
5362 @end ifset
5363 @end ifclear
5364
5365 @ifset ELF
5366 @node Internal
5367 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5368
5369 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5370 @cindex visibility
5371 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5372 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5373 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5374
5375 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5376 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5377 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5378 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5379 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5380 @end ifset
5381
5382 @node Irp
5383 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5384
5385 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5386 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5387 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5388 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5389 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5390 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5391 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5392 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5393
5394 For example, assembling
5395
5396 @example
5397 .irp param,1,2,3
5398 move d\param,sp@@-
5399 .endr
5400 @end example
5401
5402 is equivalent to assembling
5403
5404 @example
5405 move d1,sp@@-
5406 move d2,sp@@-
5407 move d3,sp@@-
5408 @end example
5409
5410 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5411
5412 @node Irpc
5413 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5414
5415 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5416 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5417 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5418 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5419 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5420 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5421 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5422 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5423
5424 For example, assembling
5425
5426 @example
5427 .irpc param,123
5428 move d\param,sp@@-
5429 .endr
5430 @end example
5431
5432 is equivalent to assembling
5433
5434 @example
5435 move d1,sp@@-
5436 move d2,sp@@-
5437 move d3,sp@@-
5438 @end example
5439
5440 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5441 at @xref{Macro}.
5442
5443 @node Lcomm
5444 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5445
5446 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5447 @cindex local common symbols
5448 @cindex symbols, local common
5449 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5450 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5451 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5452 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5453 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5454 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5455
5456 @ifset GENERIC
5457 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5458 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5459 @end ifset
5460
5461 @ifset HPPA
5462 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5463 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5464 @end ifset
5465
5466 @node Lflags
5467 @section @code{.lflags}
5468
5469 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5470 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5471 assemblers, but ignores it.
5472
5473 @ifclear no-line-dir
5474 @node Line
5475 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5476
5477 @cindex @code{line} directive
5478 @cindex logical line number
5479 @ifset aout-bout
5480 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5481 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5482 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5483 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5484 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5485 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5486 @end ifset
5487
5488 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5489 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5490 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5491 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5492 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5493
5494 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5495 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5496 debugging.
5497 @end ifclear
5498
5499 @node Linkonce
5500 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5501 @cindex COMDAT
5502 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5503 @cindex common sections
5504 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5505 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5506 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5507 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5508 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5509 unique.
5510
5511 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5512 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5513 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5514
5515 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5516 following strings. For example:
5517 @smallexample
5518 .linkonce same_size
5519 @end smallexample
5520 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5521
5522 @table @code
5523 @item discard
5524 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5525
5526 @item one_only
5527 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5528
5529 @item same_size
5530 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5531
5532 @item same_contents
5533 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5534 @end table
5535
5536 @node List
5537 @section @code{.list}
5538
5539 @cindex @code{list} directive
5540 @cindex listing control, turning on
5541 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5542 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5543 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5544 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5545 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5546
5547 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5548 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5549 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5550
5551 @node Ln
5552 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5553
5554 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5555 @ifclear no-line-dir
5556 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5557 @end ifclear
5558 @ifset no-line-dir
5559 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5560 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5561 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5562 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5563 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5564 @ifset BOUT
5565
5566 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5567 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5568 output format.
5569 @end ifset
5570 @end ifset
5571
5572 @node Loc
5573 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5574 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5575 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5576 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5577 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5578 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5579 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5580 the row is added.
5581
5582 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5583
5584 @table @code
5585 @item basic_block
5586 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5587 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5588
5589 @item prologue_end
5590 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5591 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5592
5593 @item epilogue_begin
5594 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5595 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5596
5597 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5598 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5599 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5600 either 0 or 1.
5601
5602 @item isa @var{value}
5603 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5604 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5605
5606 @item discriminator @var{value}
5607 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5608 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5609
5610 @end table
5611
5612 @node Loc_mark_labels
5613 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5614 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5615 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5616 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5617 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5618 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5619 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5620 this function respectively.
5621
5622 @ifset ELF
5623 @node Local
5624 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5625
5626 @cindex @code{local} directive
5627 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5628 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5629 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5630 they will be created.
5631
5632 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5633 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5634 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5635 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5636 @end ifset
5637
5638 @node Long
5639 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5640
5641 @cindex @code{long} directive
5642 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5643
5644 @ignore
5645 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5646 @c what it really ought to do
5647 @node Lsym
5648 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5649
5650 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5651 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5652 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5653 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5654 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5655 the same as the expression value:
5656 @smallexample
5657 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5658 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5659 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5660 @end smallexample
5661 @noindent
5662 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5663 @end ignore
5664
5665 @node Macro
5666 @section @code{.macro}
5667
5668 @cindex macros
5669 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5670 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5671 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5672
5673 @example
5674 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5675 .long \from
5676 .if \to-\from
5677 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5678 .endif
5679 .endm
5680 @end example
5681
5682 @noindent
5683 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5684
5685 @example
5686 .long 0
5687 .long 1
5688 .long 2
5689 .long 3
5690 .long 4
5691 .long 5
5692 @end example
5693
5694 @ftable @code
5695 @item .macro @var{macname}
5696 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5697 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5698 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5699 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5700 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5701 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5702 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5703 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5704 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5705 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5706 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5707 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5708
5709 @table @code
5710 @item .macro comm
5711 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5712 arguments.
5713
5714 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5715 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5716 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5717 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5718 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5719
5720 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5721 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5722 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5723 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5724 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5725 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5726 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5727 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5728
5729 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5730 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5731 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5732 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5733 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5734
5735 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5736 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5737 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5738
5739 @end table
5740
5741 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5742 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5743 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5744 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5745 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5746 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5747 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5748 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5749 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5750 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5751 this macro definition:
5752
5753 @example
5754 .macro label l
5755 \l:
5756 .endm
5757 @end example
5758
5759 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5760 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5761 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5762 identifier.
5763
5764 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5765 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5766 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5767 length specifier like this:
5768
5769 @example
5770 .macro opcode base length
5771 \base.\length
5772 .endm
5773 @end example
5774
5775 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5776 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5777 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5778
5779 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5780
5781 @table @code
5782 @item Insert white space
5783 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5784 solution. eg:
5785
5786 @example
5787 .macro label l
5788 \l :
5789 .endm
5790 @end example
5791
5792 @item Use @samp{\()}
5793 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5794 the following text. eg:
5795
5796 @example
5797 .macro opcode base length
5798 \base\().\length
5799 .endm
5800 @end example
5801
5802 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5803 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5804 used as a separator. eg:
5805
5806 @example
5807 .altmacro
5808 .macro label l
5809 l&:
5810 .endm
5811 @end example
5812 @end table
5813
5814 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5815 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5816 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5817
5818 @item .endm
5819 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5820 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5821
5822 @item .exitm
5823 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5824 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5825
5826 @cindex number of macros executed
5827 @cindex macros, count executed
5828 @item \@@
5829 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5830 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5831 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5832
5833 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5834 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5835 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5836 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5837 @end ftable
5838
5839 @node MRI
5840 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5841
5842 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5843 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5844 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5845 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5846 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5847 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5848
5849 @node Noaltmacro
5850 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5851 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5852
5853 @node Nolist
5854 @section @code{.nolist}
5855
5856 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5857 @cindex listing control, turning off
5858 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5859 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5860 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5861 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5862 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5863
5864 @node Octa
5865 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5866
5867 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5868 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5869 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5870 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5871 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5872 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5873
5874 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5875 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5876
5877 @node Offset
5878 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5879
5880 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5881 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5882 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5883 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5884 directive.
5885
5886 @node Org
5887 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5888
5889 @cindex @code{org} directive
5890 @cindex location counter, advancing
5891 @cindex advancing location counter
5892 @cindex current address, advancing
5893 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5894 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5895 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5896 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5897 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5898 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5899 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5900 is the same as the current subsection.
5901
5902 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5903 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5904 backwards.
5905
5906 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5907 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5908 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5909 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5910 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5911 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5912
5913 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5914 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5915 people's assemblers.
5916
5917 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5918 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5919 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5920 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5921
5922 @node P2align
5923 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5924
5925 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5926 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5927 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5928 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5929 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5930 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5931 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5932 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5933
5934 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5935 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5936 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5937 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5938 with no-op instructions.
5939
5940 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5941 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5942 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5943 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5944 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5945 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5946 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5947
5948 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5949 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5950 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5951 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5952 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5953 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5954 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5955 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5956 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5957 undefined.
5958
5959 @ifset ELF
5960 @node PopSection
5961 @section @code{.popsection}
5962
5963 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5964 @cindex Section Stack
5965 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5966 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5967 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5968 (@pxref{Previous}).
5969
5970 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5971 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5972 stack.
5973 @end ifset
5974
5975 @ifset ELF
5976 @node Previous
5977 @section @code{.previous}
5978
5979 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5980 @cindex Section Stack
5981 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5982 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5983 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5984 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5985
5986 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5987 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5988 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5989 subsections). For example:
5990
5991 @smallexample
5992 .section A
5993 .subsection 1
5994 .word 0x1234
5995 .subsection 2
5996 .word 0x5678
5997 .previous
5998 .word 0x9abc
5999 @end smallexample
6000
6001 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6002 section A. Whilst:
6003
6004 @smallexample
6005 .section A
6006 .subsection 1
6007 # Now in section A subsection 1
6008 .word 0x1234
6009 .section B
6010 .subsection 0
6011 # Now in section B subsection 0
6012 .word 0x5678
6013 .subsection 1
6014 # Now in section B subsection 1
6015 .word 0x9abc
6016 .previous
6017 # Now in section B subsection 0
6018 .word 0xdef0
6019 @end smallexample
6020
6021 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6022 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6023
6024 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6025 the top section on the section stack.
6026 @end ifset
6027
6028 @node Print
6029 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6030
6031 @cindex @code{print} directive
6032 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6033 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6034
6035 @ifset ELF
6036 @node Protected
6037 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6038
6039 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6040 @cindex visibility
6041 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6042 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6043
6044 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6045 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6046 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6047 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6048 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6049 this.
6050 @end ifset
6051
6052 @node Psize
6053 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6054
6055 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6056 @cindex listing control: paper size
6057 @cindex paper size, for listings
6058 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6059 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6060
6061 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6062 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6063 default width is 200 columns.
6064
6065 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6066 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6067 @code{.eject}).
6068
6069 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6070 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6071
6072 @node Purgem
6073 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6074
6075 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6076 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6077 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6078
6079 @ifset ELF
6080 @node PushSection
6081 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6082
6083 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6084 @cindex Section Stack
6085 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6086 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6087 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6088 (@pxref{Previous}).
6089
6090 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6091 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6092 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6093 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6094 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6095 @end ifset
6096
6097 @node Quad
6098 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6099
6100 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6101 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6102 each bignum, it emits
6103 @ifclear bignum-16
6104 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6105 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6106 @cindex eight-byte integer
6107 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6108
6109 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6110 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6111 @end ifclear
6112 @ifset bignum-16
6113 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6114 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6115 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6116 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6117 @end ifset
6118
6119 @node Reloc
6120 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6121
6122 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6123 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6124 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6125 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6126 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6127 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6128 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6129 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6130 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6131 section.
6132
6133 @node Rept
6134 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6135
6136 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6137 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6138 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6139
6140 For example, assembling
6141
6142 @example
6143 .rept 3
6144 .long 0
6145 .endr
6146 @end example
6147
6148 is equivalent to assembling
6149
6150 @example
6151 .long 0
6152 .long 0
6153 .long 0
6154 @end example
6155
6156 @node Sbttl
6157 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6158
6159 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6160 @cindex subtitles for listings
6161 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6162 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6163 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6164
6165 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6166 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6167
6168 @ifset COFF
6169 @node Scl
6170 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6171
6172 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6173 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6174 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6175 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6176 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6177 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6178 symbolic debugging information.
6179 @ifset BOUT
6180
6181 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6182 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6183 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6184 @end ifset
6185 @end ifset
6186
6187 @ifset COFF-ELF
6188 @node Section
6189 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6190
6191 @cindex named section
6192 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6193 named @var{name}.
6194
6195 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6196 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6197 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6198
6199 @ifset COFF
6200 @ifset ELF
6201 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6202 @subheading COFF Version
6203 @end ifset
6204
6205 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6206 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6207 ways:
6208
6209 @smallexample
6210 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6211 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6212 @end smallexample
6213
6214 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6215 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6216 @table @code
6217 @item b
6218 bss section (uninitialized data)
6219 @item n
6220 section is not loaded
6221 @item w
6222 writable section
6223 @item d
6224 data section
6225 @item e
6226 exclude section from linking
6227 @item r
6228 read-only section
6229 @item x
6230 executable section
6231 @item s
6232 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6233 @item a
6234 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6235 @item y
6236 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6237 @item 0-9
6238 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6239 @end table
6240
6241 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6242 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6243 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6244 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6245 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6246
6247 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6248 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6249 @end ifset
6250
6251 @ifset ELF
6252 @ifset COFF
6253 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6254 @subheading ELF Version
6255 @end ifset
6256
6257 @cindex Section Stack
6258 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6259 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6260 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6261 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6262
6263 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6264 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6265
6266 @smallexample
6267 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6268 @end smallexample
6269
6270 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6271 @kindex --sectname-subst
6272 @cindex section name substitution
6273 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6274 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6275 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6276
6277 @smallexample
6278 .macro exception_code
6279 .section %S.exception
6280 [exception code here]
6281 .previous
6282 .endm
6283
6284 .text
6285 [code]
6286 exception_code
6287 [...]
6288
6289 .section .init
6290 [init code]
6291 exception_code
6292 [...]
6293 @end smallexample
6294
6295 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6296 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6297 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6298 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6299 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6300 macros just for that purpose.
6301
6302 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6303 combination of the following characters:
6304 @table @code
6305 @item a
6306 section is allocatable
6307 @item e
6308 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6309 @item w
6310 section is writable
6311 @item x
6312 section is executable
6313 @item M
6314 section is mergeable
6315 @item S
6316 section contains zero terminated strings
6317 @item G
6318 section is a member of a section group
6319 @item T
6320 section is used for thread-local-storage
6321 @item ?
6322 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6323 @end table
6324
6325 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6326 @table @code
6327 @item @@progbits
6328 section contains data
6329 @item @@nobits
6330 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6331 @item @@note
6332 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6333 @item @@init_array
6334 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6335 @item @@fini_array
6336 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6337 @item @@preinit_array
6338 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6339 @end table
6340
6341 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6342
6343 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6344 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6345 @code{%} character.
6346
6347 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6348 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6349
6350 @smallexample
6351 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6352 @end smallexample
6353
6354 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6355 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6356 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6357 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6358 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6359 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6360 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6361 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6362 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6363
6364 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6365 be present along with an additional field like this:
6366
6367 @smallexample
6368 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6369 @end smallexample
6370
6371 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6372 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6373 @table @code
6374 @item comdat
6375 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6376 @item .gnu.linkonce
6377 an alias for comdat
6378 @end table
6379
6380 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6381 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6382
6383 @smallexample
6384 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6388 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6389 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6390 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6391 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6392 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6393
6394 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6395 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6396 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6397 executable. The section will contain data.
6398
6399 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6400 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6401
6402 @smallexample
6403 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6404 @end smallexample
6405
6406 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6407 separated flags:
6408 @table @code
6409 @item #alloc
6410 section is allocatable
6411 @item #write
6412 section is writable
6413 @item #execinstr
6414 section is executable
6415 @item #exclude
6416 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6417 @item #tls
6418 section is used for thread local storage
6419 @end table
6420
6421 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6422 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6423 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6424 work.
6425 @end ifset
6426 @end ifset
6427
6428 @node Set
6429 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6430
6431 @cindex @code{set} directive
6432 @cindex symbol value, setting
6433 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6434 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6435 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6436 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6437
6438 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6439 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6440 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6441 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6442 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6443 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6444 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6445 different symbols.
6446
6447 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6448 file is the last value stored into it.
6449
6450 @ifset Z80
6451 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6452 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6453 @end ifset
6454
6455 @node Short
6456 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6457
6458 @cindex @code{short} directive
6459 @ifset GENERIC
6460 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6461 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6462
6463 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6464 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6465 @end ifset
6466 @ifclear GENERIC
6467 @ifset W16
6468 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6469 @end ifset
6470 @ifset W32
6471 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6472 a 16 bit number for each.
6473 @end ifset
6474 @end ifclear
6475
6476 @node Single
6477 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6478
6479 @cindex @code{single} directive
6480 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6481 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6482 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6483 @ifset GENERIC
6484 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6485 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6486 @end ifset
6487 @ifclear GENERIC
6488 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6489 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6490 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6491 @end ifset
6492 @end ifclear
6493
6494 @ifset COFF-ELF
6495 @node Size
6496 @section @code{.size}
6497
6498 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6499
6500 @ifset COFF
6501 @ifset ELF
6502 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6503 @subheading COFF Version
6504 @end ifset
6505
6506 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6507 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6508 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6509
6510 @smallexample
6511 .size @var{expression}
6512 @end smallexample
6513
6514 @ifset BOUT
6515 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6516 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6517 ignores it.
6518 @end ifset
6519 @end ifset
6520
6521 @ifset ELF
6522 @ifset COFF
6523 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6524 @subheading ELF Version
6525 @end ifset
6526
6527 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6528 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6529
6530 @smallexample
6531 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6532 @end smallexample
6533
6534 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6535 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6536 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6537 symbols.
6538 @end ifset
6539 @end ifset
6540
6541 @ifclear no-space-dir
6542 @node Skip
6543 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6544
6545 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6546 @cindex filling memory
6547 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6548 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6549 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6550 @samp{.space}.
6551 @end ifclear
6552
6553 @node Sleb128
6554 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6555
6556 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6557 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6558 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6559 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6560
6561 @ifclear no-space-dir
6562 @node Space
6563 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6564
6565 @cindex @code{space} directive
6566 @cindex filling memory
6567 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6568 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6569 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6570 as @samp{.skip}.
6571
6572 @ifset HPPA
6573 @quotation
6574 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6575 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6576 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6577 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6578 for a summary.
6579 @end quotation
6580 @end ifset
6581 @end ifclear
6582
6583 @ifset have-stabs
6584 @node Stab
6585 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6586
6587 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6588 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6589 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6590 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6591 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6592 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6593 Up to five fields are required:
6594
6595 @table @var
6596 @item string
6597 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6598 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6599 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6600 using this field.
6601
6602 @item type
6603 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6604 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6605 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6606
6607 @item other
6608 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6609 low 8 bits of this expression.
6610
6611 @item desc
6612 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6613 bits of this expression.
6614
6615 @item value
6616 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6617 @end table
6618
6619 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6620 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6621 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6622 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6623
6624 @table @code
6625 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6626 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6627
6628 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6629 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6630 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6631 strings.
6632
6633 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6634 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6635 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6636 assembled.
6637
6638 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6639 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6640 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6641
6642 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6643 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6644 All five fields are specified.
6645 @end table
6646 @end ifset
6647 @c end have-stabs
6648
6649 @node String
6650 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6651 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6652
6653 @cindex string, copying to object file
6654 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6655 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6656 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6657 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6658 @cindex @code{string} directive
6659 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6660 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6661 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6662 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6663
6664 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6665 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6666 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6667 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6668
6669 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6670 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6671 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6672 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6673
6674 Example:
6675 @smallexample
6676 .string32 "BYE"
6677 expands to:
6678 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6679 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6680 @end smallexample
6681
6682
6683 @node Struct
6684 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6685
6686 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6687 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6688 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6689 @smallexample
6690 .struct 0
6691 field1:
6692 .struct field1 + 4
6693 field2:
6694 .struct field2 + 4
6695 field3:
6696 @end smallexample
6697 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6698 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6699 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6700 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6701 before further assembly.
6702
6703 @ifset ELF
6704 @node SubSection
6705 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6706
6707 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6708 @cindex Section Stack
6709 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6710 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6711 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6712 (@pxref{Previous}).
6713
6714 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6715 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6716 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6717 @end ifset
6718
6719 @ifset ELF
6720 @node Symver
6721 @section @code{.symver}
6722 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6723 @cindex symbol versioning
6724 @cindex versions of symbols
6725 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6726 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6727 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6728 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6729 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6730 shared library.
6731
6732 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6733 @smallexample
6734 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6735 @end smallexample
6736 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6737 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6738 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6739 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6740 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6741 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6742 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6743 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6744 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6745 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6746 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6747 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6748 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6749 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6750
6751 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6752 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6753 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6754 symbol table.
6755
6756 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6757 @smallexample
6758 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6759 @end smallexample
6760 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6761 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6762 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6763 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6764
6765 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6766 @smallexample
6767 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6768 @end smallexample
6769 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6770 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6771 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6772 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6773 @end ifset
6774
6775 @ifset COFF
6776 @node Tag
6777 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6778
6779 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6780 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6781 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6782 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6783 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6784 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6785 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6786 @ifset BOUT
6787
6788 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6789 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6790 ignores it.
6791 @end ifset
6792 @end ifset
6793
6794 @node Text
6795 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6796
6797 @cindex @code{text} directive
6798 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6799 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6800 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6801 is used.
6802
6803 @node Title
6804 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6805
6806 @cindex @code{title} directive
6807 @cindex listing control: title line
6808 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6809 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6810
6811 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6812 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6813
6814 @ifset COFF-ELF
6815 @node Type
6816 @section @code{.type}
6817
6818 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6819
6820 @ifset COFF
6821 @ifset ELF
6822 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6823 @subheading COFF Version
6824 @end ifset
6825
6826 @cindex COFF symbol type
6827 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6828 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6829 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6830 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6831
6832 @smallexample
6833 .type @var{int}
6834 @end smallexample
6835
6836 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6837 entry.
6838
6839 @ifset BOUT
6840 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6841 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6842 directive but ignores it.
6843 @end ifset
6844 @end ifset
6845
6846 @ifset ELF
6847 @ifset COFF
6848 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6849 @subheading ELF Version
6850 @end ifset
6851
6852 @cindex ELF symbol type
6853 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6854 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6855 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6856
6857 @smallexample
6858 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6859 @end smallexample
6860
6861 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6862 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6863 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6864 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6865
6866 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6867 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6868 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6869 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6870 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6871 assemblers.
6872
6873 The syntaxes supported are:
6874
6875 @smallexample
6876 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6877 .type <name>,#<type>
6878 .type <name>,@@<type>
6879 .type <name>,%<type>
6880 .type <name>,"<type>"
6881 @end smallexample
6882
6883 The types supported are:
6884
6885 @table @gcctabopt
6886 @item STT_FUNC
6887 @itemx function
6888 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6889
6890 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6891 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6892 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6893 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6894
6895 @item STT_OBJECT
6896 @itemx object
6897 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6898
6899 @item STT_TLS
6900 @itemx tls_object
6901 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6902
6903 @item STT_COMMON
6904 @itemx common
6905 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6906
6907 @item STT_NOTYPE
6908 @itemx notype
6909 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6910
6911 @item gnu_unique_object
6912 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6913 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6914 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6915 systems).
6916
6917 @end table
6918
6919 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6920
6921 @end ifset
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @node Uleb128
6925 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6926
6927 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6928 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6929 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6930 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6931
6932 @ifset COFF
6933 @node Val
6934 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6935
6936 @cindex @code{val} directive
6937 @cindex COFF value attribute
6938 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6939 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6940 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6941 entry.
6942 @ifset BOUT
6943
6944 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6945 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6946 @end ifset
6947 @end ifset
6948
6949 @ifset ELF
6950 @node Version
6951 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6952
6953 @cindex @code{version} directive
6954 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6955 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6956 @end ifset
6957
6958 @ifset ELF
6959 @node VTableEntry
6960 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6961
6962 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6963 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6964 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6965
6966 @node VTableInherit
6967 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6968
6969 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6970 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6971 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6972 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6973 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6974 @end ifset
6975
6976 @node Warning
6977 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6978 @cindex warning directive
6979 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6980 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6981
6982 @node Weak
6983 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6984
6985 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6986 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6987 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6988
6989 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6990 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6991 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6992
6993 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6994 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6995 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6996
6997 @node Weakref
6998 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6999
7000 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7001 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7002 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7003 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7004 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7005 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7006
7007 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7008 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7009 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7010 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7011 had the references to the alias removed.
7012
7013 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7014 within the assembler.
7015
7016 @node Word
7017 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7018
7019 @cindex @code{word} directive
7020 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7021 separated by commas.
7022 @ifclear GENERIC
7023 @ifset W32
7024 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7025 @end ifset
7026 @ifset W16
7027 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7028 @end ifset
7029 @end ifclear
7030 @ifset GENERIC
7031
7032 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7033 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7034 @end ifset
7035
7036 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7037 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7038 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7039 @cindex difference tables altered
7040 @cindex altered difference tables
7041 @quotation
7042 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7043 @end quotation
7044
7045 @ifset GENERIC
7046 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7047 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7048 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7049 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7050
7051 @end ifset
7052 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7053 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7054 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7055 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7056 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7057 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7058 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7059 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7060 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7061 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7062 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7063 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7064 @code{sym2}.
7065
7066 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7067 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7068 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7069 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7070 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7071 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7072 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7073
7074 @ifset INTERNALS
7075 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7076 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7077 assembly language programmers.
7078 @end ifset
7079 @end ifset
7080 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7081
7082 @ifclear no-space-dir
7083 @node Zero
7084 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7085
7086 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7087 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7088 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7089 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7090 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7091 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7092 @end ifclear
7093
7094 @node Deprecated
7095 @section Deprecated Directives
7096
7097 @cindex deprecated directives
7098 @cindex obsolescent directives
7099 One day these directives won't work.
7100 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7101 @table @t
7102 @item .abort
7103 @item .line
7104 @end table
7105
7106 @ifset ELF
7107 @node Object Attributes
7108 @chapter Object Attributes
7109 @cindex object attributes
7110
7111 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7112 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7113 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7114 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7115 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7116 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7117 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7118 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7119 newer generation at run-time.
7120
7121 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7122 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7123 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7124 correctly.
7125
7126 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7127 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7128 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7129 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7130 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7131 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7132
7133 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7134 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7135
7136 @menu
7137 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7138 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7139 @end menu
7140
7141 @node GNU Object Attributes
7142 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7143
7144 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7145 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7146
7147 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7148 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7149 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7150 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7151 architecture-dependent ones.
7152
7153 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7154
7155 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7156
7157 @table @r
7158 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7159 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7160 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7161 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7162 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7163 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7164 @end table
7165
7166 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7167
7168 @table @r
7169 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7170 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7171
7172 @itemize @bullet
7173 @item
7174 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7175 @item
7176 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7177 double-precision FPU.
7178 @item
7179 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7180 @item
7181 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7182 @item
7183 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7184 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7185 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7186 @item
7187 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7188 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7189 general-purpose registers.
7190 @item
7191 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7192 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7193 @item
7194 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7195 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7196 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7197 @end itemize
7198 @end table
7199
7200 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7201
7202 @table @r
7203 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7204 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7205
7206 @itemize @bullet
7207 @item
7208 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7209 @item
7210 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7211 @item
7212 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7213 @item
7214 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7215 @end itemize
7216
7217 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7218 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7219
7220 @itemize @bullet
7221 @item
7222 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7223 @item
7224 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7225 @item
7226 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7227 @item
7228 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7229 @end itemize
7230 @end table
7231
7232 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7233
7234 @table @r
7235 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7236 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7237
7238 @itemize @bullet
7239 @item
7240 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7241 @item
7242 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7243 @item
7244 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7245 @end itemize
7246 @end table
7247
7248 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7249 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7250
7251 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7252 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7253 mailing list.
7254
7255 @itemize @bullet
7256 @item
7257 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7258 @item
7259 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7260 @item
7261 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7262 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7263 @item
7264 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7265 @item
7266 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7267 @item
7268 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7269 @end itemize
7270
7271 @end ifset
7272
7273 @ifset GENERIC
7274 @node Machine Dependencies
7275 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7276
7277 @cindex machine dependencies
7278 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7279 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7280 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7281 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7282 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7283 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7284 optimization.
7285
7286 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7287 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7288 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7289
7290 @menu
7291 @ifset AARCH64
7292 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7293 @end ifset
7294 @ifset ALPHA
7295 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7296 @end ifset
7297 @ifset ARC
7298 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7299 @end ifset
7300 @ifset ARM
7301 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7302 @end ifset
7303 @ifset AVR
7304 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7305 @end ifset
7306 @ifset Blackfin
7307 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7308 @end ifset
7309 @ifset CR16
7310 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset CRIS
7313 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7314 @end ifset
7315 @ifset D10V
7316 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7317 @end ifset
7318 @ifset D30V
7319 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7320 @end ifset
7321 @ifset EPIPHANY
7322 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7323 @end ifset
7324 @ifset H8/300
7325 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7326 @end ifset
7327 @ifset HPPA
7328 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7329 @end ifset
7330 @ifset I370
7331 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7332 @end ifset
7333 @ifset I80386
7334 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7335 @end ifset
7336 @ifset I860
7337 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7338 @end ifset
7339 @ifset I960
7340 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7341 @end ifset
7342 @ifset IA64
7343 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7344 @end ifset
7345 @ifset IP2K
7346 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7347 @end ifset
7348 @ifset LM32
7349 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7350 @end ifset
7351 @ifset M32C
7352 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7353 @end ifset
7354 @ifset M32R
7355 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7356 @end ifset
7357 @ifset M680X0
7358 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7359 @end ifset
7360 @ifset M68HC11
7361 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7362 @end ifset
7363 @ifset METAG
7364 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7365 @end ifset
7366 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7367 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7368 @end ifset
7369 @ifset MIPS
7370 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7371 @end ifset
7372 @ifset MMIX
7373 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7374 @end ifset
7375 @ifset MSP430
7376 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7377 @end ifset
7378 @ifset NDS32
7379 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7380 @end ifset
7381 @ifset NIOSII
7382 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7383 @end ifset
7384 @ifset NS32K
7385 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7386 @end ifset
7387 @ifset PDP11
7388 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7389 @end ifset
7390 @ifset PJ
7391 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7392 @end ifset
7393 @ifset PPC
7394 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7395 @end ifset
7396 @ifset RL78
7397 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7398 @end ifset
7399 @ifset RX
7400 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7401 @end ifset
7402 @ifset S390
7403 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7404 @end ifset
7405 @ifset SCORE
7406 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7407 @end ifset
7408 @ifset SH
7409 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7410 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7411 @end ifset
7412 @ifset SPARC
7413 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7414 @end ifset
7415 @ifset TIC54X
7416 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset TIC6X
7419 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7420 @end ifset
7421 @ifset TILEGX
7422 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7423 @end ifset
7424 @ifset TILEPRO
7425 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7426 @end ifset
7427 @ifset V850
7428 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7429 @end ifset
7430 @ifset VAX
7431 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7432 @end ifset
7433 @ifset VISIUM
7434 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7435 @end ifset
7436 @ifset XGATE
7437 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7438 @end ifset
7439 @ifset XSTORMY16
7440 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7441 @end ifset
7442 @ifset XTENSA
7443 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7444 @end ifset
7445 @ifset Z80
7446 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7447 @end ifset
7448 @ifset Z8000
7449 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7450 @end ifset
7451 @end menu
7452
7453 @lowersections
7454 @end ifset
7455
7456 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7457 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7458 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7459 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7460 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7461 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7462 @c in both conditional blocks.
7463
7464 @ifset AARCH64
7465 @include c-aarch64.texi
7466 @end ifset
7467
7468 @ifset ALPHA
7469 @include c-alpha.texi
7470 @end ifset
7471
7472 @ifset ARC
7473 @include c-arc.texi
7474 @end ifset
7475
7476 @ifset ARM
7477 @include c-arm.texi
7478 @end ifset
7479
7480 @ifset AVR
7481 @include c-avr.texi
7482 @end ifset
7483
7484 @ifset Blackfin
7485 @include c-bfin.texi
7486 @end ifset
7487
7488 @ifset CR16
7489 @include c-cr16.texi
7490 @end ifset
7491
7492 @ifset CRIS
7493 @include c-cris.texi
7494 @end ifset
7495
7496 @ifset Renesas-all
7497 @ifclear GENERIC
7498 @node Machine Dependencies
7499 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7500
7501 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7502 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7503 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7504 family.
7505
7506 @menu
7507 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7508 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7509 @end menu
7510 @lowersections
7511 @end ifclear
7512 @end ifset
7513
7514 @ifset D10V
7515 @include c-d10v.texi
7516 @end ifset
7517
7518 @ifset D30V
7519 @include c-d30v.texi
7520 @end ifset
7521
7522 @ifset EPIPHANY
7523 @include c-epiphany.texi
7524 @end ifset
7525
7526 @ifset H8/300
7527 @include c-h8300.texi
7528 @end ifset
7529
7530 @ifset HPPA
7531 @include c-hppa.texi
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @ifset I370
7535 @include c-i370.texi
7536 @end ifset
7537
7538 @ifset I80386
7539 @include c-i386.texi
7540 @end ifset
7541
7542 @ifset I860
7543 @include c-i860.texi
7544 @end ifset
7545
7546 @ifset I960
7547 @include c-i960.texi
7548 @end ifset
7549
7550 @ifset IA64
7551 @include c-ia64.texi
7552 @end ifset
7553
7554 @ifset IP2K
7555 @include c-ip2k.texi
7556 @end ifset
7557
7558 @ifset LM32
7559 @include c-lm32.texi
7560 @end ifset
7561
7562 @ifset M32C
7563 @include c-m32c.texi
7564 @end ifset
7565
7566 @ifset M32R
7567 @include c-m32r.texi
7568 @end ifset
7569
7570 @ifset M680X0
7571 @include c-m68k.texi
7572 @end ifset
7573
7574 @ifset M68HC11
7575 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7576 @end ifset
7577
7578 @ifset METAG
7579 @include c-metag.texi
7580 @end ifset
7581
7582 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7583 @include c-microblaze.texi
7584 @end ifset
7585
7586 @ifset MIPS
7587 @include c-mips.texi
7588 @end ifset
7589
7590 @ifset MMIX
7591 @include c-mmix.texi
7592 @end ifset
7593
7594 @ifset MSP430
7595 @include c-msp430.texi
7596 @end ifset
7597
7598 @ifset NDS32
7599 @include c-nds32.texi
7600 @end ifset
7601
7602 @ifset NIOSII
7603 @include c-nios2.texi
7604 @end ifset
7605
7606 @ifset NS32K
7607 @include c-ns32k.texi
7608 @end ifset
7609
7610 @ifset PDP11
7611 @include c-pdp11.texi
7612 @end ifset
7613
7614 @ifset PJ
7615 @include c-pj.texi
7616 @end ifset
7617
7618 @ifset PPC
7619 @include c-ppc.texi
7620 @end ifset
7621
7622 @ifset RL78
7623 @include c-rl78.texi
7624 @end ifset
7625
7626 @ifset RX
7627 @include c-rx.texi
7628 @end ifset
7629
7630 @ifset S390
7631 @include c-s390.texi
7632 @end ifset
7633
7634 @ifset SCORE
7635 @include c-score.texi
7636 @end ifset
7637
7638 @ifset SH
7639 @include c-sh.texi
7640 @include c-sh64.texi
7641 @end ifset
7642
7643 @ifset SPARC
7644 @include c-sparc.texi
7645 @end ifset
7646
7647 @ifset TIC54X
7648 @include c-tic54x.texi
7649 @end ifset
7650
7651 @ifset TIC6X
7652 @include c-tic6x.texi
7653 @end ifset
7654
7655 @ifset TILEGX
7656 @include c-tilegx.texi
7657 @end ifset
7658
7659 @ifset TILEPRO
7660 @include c-tilepro.texi
7661 @end ifset
7662
7663 @ifset V850
7664 @include c-v850.texi
7665 @end ifset
7666
7667 @ifset VAX
7668 @include c-vax.texi
7669 @end ifset
7670
7671 @ifset VISIUM
7672 @include c-visium.texi
7673 @end ifset
7674
7675 @ifset XGATE
7676 @include c-xgate.texi
7677 @end ifset
7678
7679 @ifset XSTORMY16
7680 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7681 @end ifset
7682
7683 @ifset XTENSA
7684 @include c-xtensa.texi
7685 @end ifset
7686
7687 @ifset Z80
7688 @include c-z80.texi
7689 @end ifset
7690
7691 @ifset Z8000
7692 @include c-z8k.texi
7693 @end ifset
7694
7695 @ifset GENERIC
7696 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7697 @raisesections
7698 @end ifset
7699
7700 @node Reporting Bugs
7701 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7702 @cindex bugs in assembler
7703 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7704
7705 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7706
7707 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7708 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7709 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7710 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7711
7712 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7713 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7714
7715 @menu
7716 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7717 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7718 @end menu
7719
7720 @node Bug Criteria
7721 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7722 @cindex bug criteria
7723
7724 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7725
7726 @itemize @bullet
7727 @cindex fatal signal
7728 @cindex assembler crash
7729 @cindex crash of assembler
7730 @item
7731 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7732 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7733
7734 @cindex error on valid input
7735 @item
7736 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7737
7738 @cindex invalid input
7739 @item
7740 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7741 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7742 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7743
7744 @item
7745 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7746 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7747 @end itemize
7748
7749 @node Bug Reporting
7750 @section How to Report Bugs
7751 @cindex bug reports
7752 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7753
7754 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7755 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7756 contact that organization first.
7757
7758 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7759 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7760 distribution.
7761
7762 @ifset BUGURL
7763 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7764 to @value{BUGURL}.
7765 @end ifset
7766
7767 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7768 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7769 fact or leave it out, state it!
7770
7771 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7772 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7773 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7774 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7775 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7776 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7777 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7778 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7779 and the most helpful.
7780
7781 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7782 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7783 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7784
7785 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7786 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7787 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7788 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7789
7790 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7791
7792 @itemize @bullet
7793 @item
7794 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7795 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7796
7797 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7798 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7799
7800 @item
7801 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7802
7803 @item
7804 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7805 version number.
7806
7807 @item
7808 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7809 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7810
7811 @item
7812 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7813 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7814 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7815
7816 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7817 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7818
7819 @item
7820 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7821 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7822 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7823 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7824 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7825 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7826 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7827
7828 @item
7829 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7830 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7831
7832 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7833 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7834 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7835 make a mistake.
7836
7837 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7838 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7839 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7840 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7841 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7842 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7843 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7844 observations.
7845
7846 @item
7847 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7848 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7849 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7850 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7851 by line number.
7852
7853 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7854 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7855 @end itemize
7856
7857 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7858
7859 @itemize @bullet
7860 @item
7861 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7862
7863 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7864 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7865 changes will not affect it.
7866
7867 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7868 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7869 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7870 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7871
7872 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7873 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7874 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7875 less time, and so on.
7876
7877 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7878 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7879
7880 @item
7881 A patch for the bug.
7882
7883 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7884 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7885 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7886 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7887
7888 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7889 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7890 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7891 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7892
7893 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7894 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7895 help us to understand.
7896
7897 @item
7898 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7899
7900 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7901 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7902 @end itemize
7903
7904 @node Acknowledgements
7905 @chapter Acknowledgements
7906
7907 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7908 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7909 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7910 @c (October 2012),
7911 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7912
7913 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7914 more details?}
7915
7916 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7917 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7918 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7919
7920 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7921 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7922 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7923 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7924 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7925 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7926 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7927 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7928 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7929 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7930
7931 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7932 in format-specific I/O modules.
7933
7934 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7935 has done much work with it since.
7936
7937 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7938
7939 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7940
7941 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7942 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7943
7944 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7945 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7946 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7947 support a.out format.
7948
7949 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7950 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7951 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7952 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7953 targets.
7954
7955 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7956 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7957 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7958 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7959 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7960 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7961 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7962
7963 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7964 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7965 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7966 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7967
7968 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7969
7970 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7971
7972 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7973 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7974 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7975 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7976
7977 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7978 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7979 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7980 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7981 and some initial 64-bit support).
7982
7983 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7984
7985 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7986 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7987
7988 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7989 flavors.
7990
7991 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7992 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7993
7994 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7995 configuration enhancements.
7996
7997 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7998
7999 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8000 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8001 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8002 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8003
8004 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8005 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8006 @include fdl.texi
8007
8008 @node AS Index
8009 @unnumbered AS Index
8010
8011 @printindex cp
8012
8013 @bye
8014 @c Local Variables:
8015 @c fill-column: 79
8016 @c End:
This page took 0.18274 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.